JP2019072042A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the performance effect of a specific performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a performance device (e.g., a performance accessory 201) capable of executing a performance and an operational movable body (e.g., a push button 120). The game machine can execute a specific performance (e.g., a specific performance in a mode indicated in Fig. 37(5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the performance device and can operate the movable body during execution of the specific performance (e.g., can execute a specific performance indicated in the Fig. 37(5) after a push button 120 indicated in Fig. 37(3) vibrates). In addition, specific display execution means changes a first specific display, after it is displayed in a period in which detection means is disabled for detection, to a second specific display more advantageous to the user than the first specific display as a specific display corresponding to the detection means detectable of the operation of the user. The specific display execution means then executes an operation performance using the changed second specific display in a period in which the detection means is enabled for detection.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot by a launch device into a game area by a launch device and the game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to In addition, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "variation") is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, Therefore, there is one configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine, specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for a predetermined game medium to one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display device, variable display of identification information is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing, and variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined gaming medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and a specific prize is generated, the gaming state is determined to be a predetermined gaming value to the player There is one which is configured to be in a state of giving to (so-called slot machine).

  In addition, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a hit ball, or in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate the right and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions of the prize ball payout.

  In pachinko gaming machines, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started on the variable display device based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. If you do, a "big hit" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol (final stop symbol) finally stop-display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. And, in each opening period, when there are winnings to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). In addition, an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

  Furthermore, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined time, and stop and shake in a state consistent with the specific display result. Motion, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of display symbols are changed, and a big hit can occur before the final result is displayed An effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “off”, and the fluctuation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Among such gaming machines, there is one configured to be able to execute a specific effect using a rendering device. For example, in Patent Document 1, after the display area of the effect display device is display-controlled in the non-display state (dark state), a special light vortex image is controlled to be displayed in the dark-displayed display area of the effect display device. It is described that a light emission effect (specific effect) is performed.

JP 2008-259540 A (paragraph 0849-0850, FIG. 90, FIG. 91)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when performing a specific effect, it is not always possible to sufficiently enhance the effect of the specific effect.

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the game machine which can improve the presentation effect of a specific presentation.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a rendering device (for example, a rendering combination 201) capable of performing rendering, and an operable movable body (for example, pushing) Specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 37 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the button 120) and the effect device. A portion that executes step S8120), a movable body control unit that operates the movable body (for example, a portion that executes step S8111 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and a detection unit that can detect the player's operation (for example, Push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, Corresponding specific display (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80 Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) for performing button (white) D 902 U, large button (red) D 903 U, stick D 904 U, etc. The body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is performed) And the specific display execution unit is configured to display the first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D 901 or the like) as the specific display and the player more than the first specific display. The second specific display (for example, the second with a high degree of advantage (for example, the expectation for the big hit expectation, the 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 49), the expectation for the probability variation big hit when there is a big hit and a definite variation big hit) 1 When the small display (white) D901 is used as the specific display, the second specific display includes the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display as the large button (white) D902 The second specific display can display the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the second specific display can display the stick D904 etc.) when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903. After the first specific display is displayed in the non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), the first specific display is displayed as the second specific display. After the small button (white) D901 is displayed after changing to the specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 74C), the small button (white) D901 is shown as FIG. Furthermore, the large button (white) D 902 is changed to the large button (red) D 903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I), and the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIG. In the indicated T11 to T13 and the like, the second specific display after change (for example, large button (red) D 903 and large button (red) D 903 U and the like as shown in FIG. 75 (J) and FIG. A motion presentation (for example, a presentation for notifying the result as shown in FIG. 75 (L) by prompting an operation as shown in FIG. 75 (K)) is executed. According to such a configuration, the rendering effect of the specific rendering can be improved.

(Means 2) In means 1, the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect after the movable body is operated by the movable body control means (for example, in the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3)). Later, the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) may be executed. According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be focused on before the start of the specific effect.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the movable body is an operation means (for example, the push button 120) operable by the player, and the movable body control means operates the operation means when the specific effect is performed. The vibration operation is performed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is performed), the operation means 2 and 3 may be configured to include the vibration receiving member 303). According to such a configuration, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to a specific effect by sight and touch.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to 3, the light emitter for effect (for example, the frame LED 28) and the display means are darkened when specific effect is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. Means for causing the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 to be displayed in a dark state (blackout display)) (for example, a portion for executing step S8108 in the effect control microcomputer 100); A light emission control means for performing light emission control of the light emitter (for example, a portion for executing steps S8109 and S8123 in the effect control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the movable body control means turns off the light emitter for effect by the light emission control means The movable body can be operated in the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (3), the effect display device 9 displays the While being Kkuauto displayed), while the frame LED28 are all turned off, vibrating operation push button 120) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively guide the player's gaze to a specific effect.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to 4, the movable body control means includes at least a first operation mode (for example, vibration time 1 second) and a second operation mode (for example, vibration time 3 seconds). The movable body can be operated by a plurality of types of operation modes including (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, 1 second, 3 seconds and 5 seconds are provided as vibration time of the push button 120), The specific effect execution means differs in the execution mode of the specific effect depending on whether the movable body is operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 33). The specific effect A is performed when the vibration operation of the push button 120 with the vibration time of 1 second is performed, and the specific effect B is performed when the vibration operation of the push button 120 with the vibration time of 3 seconds is performed. I know) It may be configured. According to such a configuration, attention can also be given to the operation mode of the movable body.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to 5, display means (for example, effect display device 9 etc.) having a display area and a predetermined area (for example, an upper area) in which the player can not visually recognize the display area A predetermined display control means (for example, in the second embodiment) capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, a mini-image) on 5B etc. (for example, in the second embodiment) A process table is selected according to the process, the process of step S8005 of the effect design variation start process according to the process table according to the advance effect and the process of effect pattern variation (step S802) to execute the advance effect part And a gaze guidance effect (for example, a mini-image moving in the region Z1) for guiding the player's gaze in a predetermined region The visual line guidance effect executing means that can be executed in the area (for example, in the second embodiment, the process table according to the notice effect is selected in step S8003 of the effect pattern variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 100 According to the process table corresponding to the advance effect, the process of step S8005 of the effect pattern change start process and the portion during which the advance effect is executed by executing the effect symbol in-process process (step S802) It is also good. According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the embodiments of the invention described below include the inventions according to the following means 7 to 15. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine which displays an operation promoting image corresponding to the operation means during the effective period of the operation means (button or the like) as disclosed in JP-A-2016-83473. There is. In this gaming machine, when the user does not perform the operation, the operation promoting image may be gradually enlarged, or may be changed from the button-shaped operation promoting image to the patram-shaped operation promoting image. However, since the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means changes with time and the operation promotion image does not change when it is operated earlier, there is a problem that the rendering effect is poor. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine with improved rendering effects is desired.

(Means 7) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.), which can detect the action of the player Means (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) and specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small buttons (white) shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80 Specific display execution means for performing D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.) (Eg, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.), and the identification The display execution means includes, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901 etc.) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit ( The second identification display (for example, the first identification display is a small button (white) D901) which has a high expectation for the case shown in FIG. The second specific display is a large button (white) D902, a large button (red) D903, a stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is a large button (white) D902, the second specific display is a large button (red) D903 When the first specific display is a large button (red) D 903 such as the stick D 904, the second specific display can display the stick D 904 etc.), and the detection means does not have detection After the first specific display is displayed in a period (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 74C) After the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 75, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 75 (G), and further, the large button (white) D902 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 75 (I), the large button (red) D 903 is changed to the above-mentioned change in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). Operation presentation (for example, FIG. 75 (K) using the second specific display (eg, large button (red) D 903 or large button (red) D 903 U, etc. as shown in FIG. 75 (J) or FIG. 75 (K)) Prompt the operation as shown in Figure 75. As shown in (L), it is characterized in that an effect of notifying the result is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(Means 8) In the means 7, in the first specific display, an action effect (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, a strong action effect shown in FIG. 69C) is performed. As a result, the second specific display is changed (for example, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 76 (C) is changed to the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 76 (D) and FIG. 76 (E). As a weak action effect of displaying the acting image JS901 and the image JS902 is executed, it changes to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 76 (E), and the large button (white) shown in FIG. 77 (G) As shown in FIG. 77 (H) and FIG. 77 (I), D 902 displays the image TS 901 that acts on the large button (white) D 902, the image TS 902, and the image TS 903 displayed in FIG. As shown in I) The small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 80 (A) changes to a tick D904, and as shown in FIG. 80 (B) and FIG. 80 (C), an image KS901 or image KS902 acting on the small button (white) D901. The image may be changed to the stick D 904 as shown in FIG. 80C by executing the strong-action effect of displaying the image KS 903.

  According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(Means 9) In means 7 or 8, there are a plurality of types of action effects (for example, weak action effects, medium action effects, strong action effects, etc. shown in FIG. 69 (C) etc.) acting on the specific display, The rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), there is no change and there is a change (weak change, middle) In the case of change or strong change), the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, so the button changes to the second specific display according to which button etc. The ratio may be different).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(Means 10) In any of the means 7 to the means 9, a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, weak action effects, medium action effects, strong action effects, etc. shown in FIG. 69 (C)) There are a plurality of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D 902, large button (red) D 903, stick D 904, large button (white shown in FIG. 67, FIG. ) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is performed (for example, FIG. 69 (C In the case of weak change (one step change), medium change (two step change), and strong change (three step change), as shown in), weak action rendition, middle action rendition, strong action rendition The percentage of each decision is different Therefore, the ratio of weak change, medium change, or strong change differs depending on which button etc. the action effect is executed.For example, when the small button (white) D 901 before the change, the weak change When is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903 and the strong change is executed. Then, the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to which specific display varies depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is executed. Good.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 7 to the means 10, the detection means is detected by the detection means corresponding to the specific display after change, which has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) Perform the operation effect detected (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after the change is performed, and as shown in FIG. The action presentation detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 is executed, and the action presentation detected by the stick controller 9031 A corresponding to the stick D 904 after change as shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 80 May be performed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(Means 12) In any one of measures 7 to 11, the specific display execution means performs the specific display in an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). To display the specific display according to a mode indicating the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 80, a small button (white) D 901 on which the control line K 90 is superimposed, a control) A large button (white) D 902 on which the line K 90 is superimposed, a large button (red) D 903 on which the regulation line K 90 is superimposed, and a stick D 904 on which the regulation line K 90 is superimposed may be displayed.

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(Means 13) In any one of means 7 to 12, the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, displays the specific display over a plurality of (re) variable displays as a pseudo continuous fluctuation. The display may be changeable by displaying a specific display over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(Means 14) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect, countdown) for notifying that the gaming machine of any of the means 7 to 13 is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute the effect, the feature falling effect etc.), and the effect presentation acting on the specific display is executed by the execution of the advance presentation effect, and the second specific display is executed by the operation presentation being performed. It may be changed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(Means 15) The gaming machine according to any of the means 7 to 14 has the setting state relating to the effect in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be ineffective) or the second state (for example, the auto button Setting means (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 81 etc.) which can be set to a state in which the function is effectively set, etc., and a specific effect (for example, button advance effect A) ~ C and in the decision button effect, based on the detection of the operation of the push button 9031B, display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, displaying the advance notice and the display of acceptance or rejection etc.) Effect executing means (for example, variable display effect process shown in FIG. 64, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, detects the detection result of the detecting means Based on the above, it is possible to execute the specific effect as the effect execution condition is satisfied, while in the second state, the specific effect can be executed as the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means. (For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed) The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means while the variable display is being executed (for example, the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 of FIG. 81 is executed). Part etc.).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a specific presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of suggestion production and specific production. It is the figure which looked at the effect display apparatus and character (in dotted line) in 2nd Embodiment from the front. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 38 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the motion of mini-image AC in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of a production | presentation screen of the notice production | presentation which announces the expectation degree of execution of the super reach in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of a production | presentation screen of the notice production | presentation which announces the big hit expectation degree in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by another mode. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a change category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a change category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a button development production category and a button development production pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of button development production determination processing. It is an explanatory view explaining a determination rate etc. of button development production. It is an explanatory view explaining a decision rate of a button development production pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the specific button development production in various periods in a button development production. It is an explanatory view explaining a flow of concrete button development presentation. It is an explanatory view explaining a flow of concrete button development presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an auto button setting process. FIG. 14 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a display mode in the case of setting the function of the auto button to valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an automatic button function.

Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 5) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 5) for detecting a predetermined instructing operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation stick of the stick controller 122. 5) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 5) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIGS. 1 and 5) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 361 (see FIG. 5) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, and may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number. . Note that a combined hold storage display unit may be provided that displays the total number (the total number of pending storages) that is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfaction of execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning ball device 20 for forming a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In this embodiment, since the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is provided on the right of the game area 7, in the big hit gaming state, the player causes the special variable winning prize ball device 20 to win the gaming ball. In order to aim at the right side of the game area 7, a shooting operation (so-called right-handed) is performed. The gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 may be provided to the right of the game area 7 so that a right-handed operation can be performed even when the game state is the time saving state or the high base state. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, below the variable winning ball device 15, a rendering combination 201 imitating a face of a character or the like is provided. The feature LED 202 is provided on a part of the effect role 201 that imitates the face of a character or the like, and it is possible to perform a predetermined effect by displaying the feature LED 202 of the effect 201 on by lighting. It is done. Further, in this embodiment, the accessory LED 202 is configured by a full color LED, and can emit light in various lighting colors such as white and red, and by changing the lighting color in order to emit light It is also possible to emit light by rainbow color display (rainbow display).

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probable change state) when becoming a probability change big hit, and the game ball becomes easy to get started (that is, the special symbol display 8a, 8b or the effect) A transition is made to a high base state which is a gaming state controlled such that execution conditions of variable display in the display device 9 are easily established) (in this embodiment, transition to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  Next, the internal structure of the push button 120 will be described. 2 and 3 are exploded perspective views for explaining the internal structure of the push button 120. FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, inside the transparent cover 301 of the push button 120, a holding member 302 for holding the member to be vibrated 303 is provided. In this embodiment, one holding member 302 holds all the vibrated members 303. In the holding member 302, a plurality of (13) arrangement holes 325 for arranging the respective vibration receiving members 303 are penetrated. The vibration receiving member 303 and the arrangement hole 325 correspond one to one, and the shape of the arrangement hole 325 has a regular hexagonal shape in plan view corresponding to the shape of the vibration receiving member 303. Furthermore, the vibration receiving member 303 is inserted into the arrangement hole 325 from below. On the outer peripheral surface of the lower end portion of the member 303 to be vibrated, a protruding edge portion (not shown) which is a retention stopper for preventing removal from the arrangement hole 325 is provided in a protruding manner. The protruding edge portion is provided so that the diameter dimension of the lower end portion of the member 303 to be vibrated is larger than the opening dimension of the arrangement hole 325.

  Further, in the vicinity of the arrangement hole 325 in the holding member 302, it has the same shape as the vibration receiving member 303 and is formed in a regular hexagonal shape in plan view, and it is visually recognized that the vibration receiving member 303 is vibrating. An auxiliary visual recognition unit 326 is formed to facilitate the process. The auxiliary visual recognition part 326 is a part integrally formed on the holding member 302, and provided at a plurality of places of the holding member 302, in particular, around the arrangement hole 325. It is not necessary that all the auxiliary visual recognition parts 326 have the same shape as the vibration receiving member 303, and the auxiliary visual recognition parts 326 formed at the corners of the holding member 302 have a partially cut away shape, that is The part has the same shape as that of a part of the vibration receiving member 303 (a shape in which a part of a regular hexagon is cut out).

  Further, in this embodiment, by driving the vibrator motor 126 provided in the stick controller 122, the stick controller 122 can be vibrated, and the push button 120 integrally configured with the stick controller 122 is used. Can also be vibrated, whereby the member 303 to be vibrated can also be vibrated. The vibration member 303 vibrates with a large amplitude when the push button 120 is vibrating, but since the auxiliary visual recognition unit 326 integral with the holding member 302 vibrates with a smaller amplitude than the vibration member 303, the vibration mode thereof The vibration of the member to be vibrated 303 is emphasized and visually recognized due to the difference in (amplitude).

  Although FIGS. 2 and 3 illustrate the vibrating member 303 as halftone dots for the sake of understanding, the color of the vibrating member 303 and the color of the auxiliary visual recognition unit 326 are the same. . That is, in the state where the member to be vibrated 303 is not vibrating, it is difficult to distinguish between the member to be vibrated 303 and the auxiliary visual recognition part 326, and it is difficult to identify which portion is the portion to vibrate. . Therefore, when the member 303 to be vibrated starts to vibrate, unexpectedness is generated and the fun of the game is improved.

  Further, below the driven member 303, a vibrating lens member 304 for transmitting vibration to each driven member 303 is provided. In this embodiment, a single plate-like vibrating lens member 304 is provided, and the vibration applied to the vibrating lens member 304 is transmitted to each of the vibrating members 303. The inside of the member to be vibrated 303 has a hollow shape, and the center portion thereof has a rocking shaft projecting downward. A plurality of bottomed holes 335 in which the lower end of the swinging shaft of the member 303 to be vibrated is disposed on the upper surface side of the vibrating lens member 304. Further, the vibration receiving member 303 is provided so as to be swingable around the lower end of the swing shaft.

  Further, among the plurality of bottomed holes 335 formed in the vibrating lens member 304, some of the bottomed holes 335 are formed in a convex portion 336 provided to project upward from the vibrating lens member 304. The protrusion lengths of the convex portions 336 are formed to be different. That is, when the height position of the bottom portion of each bottomed hole portion 335 is different, when the member to be vibrated 303 is swung about the lower end of the swinging shaft contacting the bottom surface of the bottomed hole portion 335 In addition, the vibration modes of the respective vibrating members 303 are different (swinging randomly). In this embodiment, in the vibrating lens member 304, the height position of the bottomed hole portion 335 provided on the central portion side of the push button 120 is high, and the bottom hole portion 335 provided on the peripheral side of the push button 120. Height position is lowered. The height positions of the respective vibration receiving members 303 are different according to the difference in the height position of the bottomed hole portion 335.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a plate-like button base member 305 is provided below the vibrating lens member 304. The holding member 302 holding the member to be vibrated 303 is connected to the button base member 305 in a state in which the vibrating lens member 304 is accommodated inside. The vibrating lens member 304 is placed on the upper surface side of the button base member 305, and the vibrating lens member 304 is provided so as to be able to vibrate with respect to the button base member 305. Further, on the peripheral edge of the button base member 305, there is provided an engaged portion 343 with which the engagement convex portion 327 provided on the peripheral edge of the holding member 302 is engaged. In addition, the transparent cover 301 is connected to the button base member 305 from above. At the peripheral edge of the button base member 305, an engagement convex portion 345 engaged with an engaged concave portion 323 provided at the peripheral edge of the transparent cover 301 is provided.

  In this embodiment, the holding member 302, the member to be vibrated 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 are made of a material having translucency, and as described later, a button for effect emitted from below. The light of the LED 360 can be transmitted. The vibrating member 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 do not have to be completely transparent, and may be opaque members such as ground glass, as long as they have at least a light transmitting property. It may be a colored member.

  In addition, although the transparent cover 301 mentioned above is comprised as a perfect transparent member, this invention is not limited to this, The transparency degree of the grade which the vibration aspect of the to-be-vibrated member 303 can be visually recognized (recognition) The transparent cover 301 may be an opaque member such as ground glass or a colored member.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a plate-shaped base member 306 is provided below the button base member 305. At a central portion of the base member 306, a coil spring 355 as biasing means for biasing the button base member 305 in one direction (upward) is provided. One end of the coil spring 355 is disposed in a spring placement portion 354 formed in the central portion of the upper surface of the base member 306, and the other end of the coil spring 355 is a spring formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the button base member 305. It is attached to the attachment convex part. The coil spring 355 has a biasing force in a direction in which the coil spring 355 extends. The coil spring 355 applies a biasing force to the button base member 305 so as to move upward.

  Further, in the vicinity of the peripheral edge on the lower surface side of the button base member 305, an engaging claw 344 inserted into the mounting hole 353 of the base member 306 is provided so as to protrude downward. The button base member 305 is attached to the base member 306 so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 306 by the engagement claw 344 being loosely fitted in the attachment hole 353. Further, the lower end portion of the engagement claw 344 has a hook shape so that the engagement claw 344 does not come off from the mounting hole 353. That is, even if the button base member 305 is lifted by the biasing force of the coil spring 355, the movement range is restricted by the engagement claw 344.

  Also, on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent cover 301, a horizontally protruding convex strip 321 formed to surround the outer peripheral edge is provided. Further, a convex piece 322 is provided at the front end of the transparent cover 301. A convex strip 321 of the transparent cover 301 is hooked to a hooked hook provided on the inner peripheral edge of the button disposition portion 308, and a convex piece 322 of the transparent cover 301 is disposed at the front end portion of the button disposition portion 308 Since the button base member 305 is lifted, the movement range is restricted by being hooked to the hooked portion.

  In this embodiment, when the player presses the push button 120, the transparent cover 301, the holding member 302, the member to be vibrated 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 are integrated to form a coil spring. It is moved downward against the biasing force of 355. In this embodiment, the transparent cover 301, the holding member 302, the member to be vibrated 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 constitute a moving portion supported by the base member 306 so as to be movable.

  In addition, the push button 120 is arranged in the inner arrangement space 370 of the button arrangement unit 308. A screw fixing hole 312 into which a screw for fixing the base member 306 is inserted is provided in an upper portion of the operation rod 309 (a root portion of the button placement portion 308). The screw fixing holes 312 are provided at two places on the left and right. Furthermore, female screw parts 356 are provided at two positions on the left and right near one end (in this embodiment, near the front end in this embodiment) of the base member 306. The base member 306 is fixed to the operation rod 309 by screwing a screw inserted into the screw fixing hole 312 into the female screw portion 356. Then, when the vibrator motor 126 is driven and the operation rod 309 is vibrated, the vibration is transmitted to the base member 306 through the screw inserted in the screw fixing hole 312 and provided above the base member 306. The push button 120 (moving unit) vibrates.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a button substrate 307 is provided below the base member 306. On this button board 307, a button LED 360 for effect is mounted. A plurality (seven in this embodiment) of the button LEDs 360 are provided on the button substrate 307, and the window member 351 in which the button LEDs 360 are arranged at positions corresponding to the button LEDs 360 is provided on the base member 306. It is open. Then, when the button LED 360 is turned on, light enters from the lower surface of the button base member 305, and light refracted and diffused by the light diffusion portion of the vibrating lens member 304 is transmitted to the holding member 302 and the vibrated member 303. It is incident from below. Therefore, when the push button 120 is viewed from the viewpoint of the player, the holding member 302 and the member 303 to be vibrated appear to emit light as well.

  Further, on the button substrate 307, a push sensor 361 (photo sensor) for detecting whether or not the pressing operation performed on the push button 120 has been performed is mounted. Furthermore, in the base member 306, a window 352 in which the push sensor 361 is disposed is opened at a position corresponding to the push sensor 361. The push sensor 361 is exposed to the upper surface side of the base member 306 through the window portion 352.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as a backup power source discharges and the backup power source can not supply power). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  In addition, the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side of the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 via the lamp driver board 35, the feature LED 202 provided on the effect role 201, and the push button While performing display control of button LED360 provided in 120, control of the sound output from the speaker 27 via the audio | voice output board | substrate 70 is performed.

  The effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 provided in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 361 provided in the push button 120, as described later. (See FIG. 5), but illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 361 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to light emitters such as the frame LED 28, the feature LED 202 and the button LED 360 based on a signal that drives the LEDs.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, if the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, for example, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 10). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not, instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, for example, the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, and the detection signal from the first start opening switch 13a and the second start opening switch 14a is input. In the case, three winning balls shall be paid out. Further, for example, when the gaming ball is won in the special winning opening and the detection signal from the count switch 23 is input, it is assumed that fifteen winning balls are paid out.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to on / off of solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 9A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state), and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 9A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 9B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 9C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 9B and 9C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 9A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  9D and 9E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 9 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 9 (E) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9 (D) and 9 (E), five judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit category determination table 131b, one decision value is assigned to "sudden oddity big hit" (a ratio of 1/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9 (D) and 9 (E), there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as jackpot types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit state of 15 rounds and is shifted to a time saving state only after the end of the big hit state (see step S 167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). In addition, even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit playing state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a time saving state (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, it is transitioned to a definite change state after the termination of that sudden change big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a definite change state and also to a short time state. Step S169, which will be described later) See S170). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  Note that the aspect of sudden positive jackpot is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the opening number of the big winning opening may be 15 times (15 rounds) the same as that of the big hit or sudden odd variation big hit normally, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be made extremely short such as 0.1 second.

  In this embodiment, even in the case of "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as the big hit gaming state by "suddenly positive variation big hit" is performed. It will be. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, it is not necessary to provide a small hit, when it is comprised so that all the big hit types may be a definite variation big hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big winning opening be made the same for the big hit and the small hit suddenly.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  10 and 11 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol variably displayed on the presentation display device 9 corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening a special winning opening) indicating closing of the special winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command A 400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning combination designation command) for designating that the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening has been detected.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, the first pending storage number addition designation command, the second pending storage number addition designation command, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command, and the second pending storage can be used as the pending information capable of identifying the pending storage number. Although the case of transmitting the storage number subtraction designation command has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the hold information, an effect control command (first hold memory number specification command) for specifying the first hold memory number itself, and an effect control command for specifying the second hold memory number itself (second hold memory number specification command) May be configured to transmit. In addition, for example, as the holding information, a production control command (total holding memory number specifying command) for specifying a total number (total number of holding memories) which is the sum of the first holding memory number and the second holding memory number is transmitted You may configure it. In this case, when configured to transmit the combined reserve storage number designation information, for example, the effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that there is a first start prize, or the second start prize By transmitting the effect control command (the second start winning a prize specifying command) specifying that there is an event, so that it can be specified which of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number has increased Good.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  12 and 13 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, when the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 23), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (A). In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 15) (step S1214A) . In the process of step S1214A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 15, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1215A).

  Next, the second start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending opening). Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S1211 B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 15) (step S1214B) . In the process of step S1214B, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the time of the fluctuation start of the second special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1215B).

  16 and 17 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the second pending storage number (step S52). Specifically, the value of the second pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0, the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  By performing the processes of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background designating command, the variation pattern command, the display result designating command, the first pending storage number subtraction designating command or the second pending storage is provided for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the order of the number subtraction designation command. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, The first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passing processing or in step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passing processing. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit determination module compares the predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 9) with the big hit determination random number, and executes processing for determining a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-deterministic change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation time big hit determination table (the table in the ROM 54 to which the right side of FIG. 9A is set) in which the number of big hit determination values is set large in advance, and the number of big hit determination values A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 9A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 9B and 9C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9C is used to determine whether or not the small hit is to be made. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9D. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Moreover, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S81). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 selects one of the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination tables as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S82). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S83). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S84). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S85). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to a definite changing state or a time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normally a big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the fluctuation indication of specified number of times (100 times with this execution form) ends. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the predetermined number of times of variation display ends. In addition, when it is determined to be "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit", the probability flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the processing for ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S85), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S86). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S86), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for normal use as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S87). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S86), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern for shortening as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. The type determination table is selected (step S88). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S85), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (in this embodiment, the time change state is always made when transitioning to the positive change state) Are also transferred (refer to steps S169 and S170), and if it is determined to be Y in step S85, the CPU 56 may change the type of variation pattern type if there is a probability change state or if it is controlled to only the time saving state). As a table used to determine one of a plurality of types, a time-saving variation pattern type determination table for time reduction is selected (step S89). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S85 to S89, the variation pattern type determination table for loss for shortening Is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, a time-shortening change pattern type determination table for short time is selected. In this case, a variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined as a variation pattern type in the process of step S90 described later, and when the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined, In the process of step S92, the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S82, S84, S87, S88 or S89. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S90).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S90, a hit variation pattern determination table, and an out-of-range variation pattern determination table. One of them is selected (step S91). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S91. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S92). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S93). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S94).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S95). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S96).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 10) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S120). If not set, the process proceeds to step S126. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 specification command (steps S121 and S122). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S123 and S124). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S125).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S120), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S126). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S127). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S126), that is, when the small hit flag is out, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S128).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S129).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first reserve storage number subtraction designation command or the second retention storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Note that whether or not the first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted, for example, in step S1122 described later, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage When transmitting the number subtraction specification command, the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmitted flag indicating that the first storage storage number subtraction specification command or the second storage storage number subtraction specification command has been transmitted is set, and in step S1121 Then, it may be checked whether the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set or not. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Then, if the first reserve storage number subtraction designation command or the second retention storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs the retention storage number subtraction designation command of the special symbol pointer indicating the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Control to be sent to the network (step S1122). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second holding storage number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, is a probability variation flag indicating that it is a definite variation state, a time shortening flag indicating that it is a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) in the big winning opening open before timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) in the big winning opening open before timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time of the sudden big change big hit is set as the open time per one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a "big hit" or "probably big hit" sends a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)), and if it is "suddenly big hit" a small hit / sudden positive big hit The end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit to be finished this time is normally a big hit (step S166). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  Usually, if it is not a big hit (that is, if it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets a definite variation flag and shifts to a definite variation state (step S169) and sets a short time flag to shift to a short time condition (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of a program for special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 5 specification command) in the RAM The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (step S621), the CPU for effect control 101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / suddenly positive probability big hit start designation command (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control sets a small hit / sudden positive turn big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (step S625), the CPU 101 for production control sets a big hit end designated command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly definite oddity big hit end designation command (step S627), the CPU 101 for production control sets the small hit / suddenly positive oddity big hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S629). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8001. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 30, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops Determine the combination of the production design that the 3 designs are aligned with the same even design as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols aligned with the same odd symbols.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that reminds of being in a definite variation state is also referred to as a definite variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that reminds of not becoming a definite variation condition is not definite symbol It is also called.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 executes a specific effect setting process of determining the presence / absence and type of the specific effect using the effect combination 201 (step S8002).

  In this embodiment, although the description is omitted, various notice effects (for example, step-up notice effect, character notice effect, button notice effect, feature notice effect, group A notice effect, a mini character notice effect) may be configured to be executable. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process, when the advance notice effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect is executed and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the notice is made in step S8003 described later. The process table may be selected according to the presentation.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step S8003). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8003 (step S8004).

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 31 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8005). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8006).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8007).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process (step S8002) in the effect symbol variation start process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the variable display started this time is a big hit (step S5001). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area whether or not the variable display to start this time is a big hit. Alternatively, for example, the determination may be made by confirming whether or not the variation pattern command read out in step S8000 specifies a variation pattern for the big hit.

  If the variable display to be started this time is a big hit (Y in step S5001), the CPU 101 for effect control selects the specific effect determination table for the big hit as a table for determining the presence and type of the specific effect. (Step S5002). If the variable display to be started this time is not a big hit (N in step S5001), the CPU 101 for effect control selects the specific effect determination table for losing as the table for determining the presence and type of the specific effect. (Step S5003). Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes a lottery process based on random numbers using the specific effect determination table selected in steps S5002 and S5003 to determine the presence / absence and type of specific effect (step S5004).

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the specific effect determination table. Among these, FIG. 33A shows a specific example of the jackpot specific effect determination table selected in step S5002. Further, FIG. 33 (B) shows a specific example of the specific effect determination table for detachment selected in step S5003. As shown in FIG. 33, in the specific effect determination table, determination values are respectively assigned to no specific effect, specific effect A, specific effect B, and specific effect C.

  In this embodiment, as the specific effect, an effect that lights on the feature LED 202 provided in the effect combination 201 is displayed. In this embodiment, three types of specific effects A to C are provided for the specific effect. The specific effect A is an effect of causing the feature LED 202 provided on the effect character 201 to emit light in a white lighting color. Further, the specific effect B is an effect of causing the feature LED 202 provided in the effect combination 201 to emit light in a red lighting color. Further, the specific effect C is an effect of emitting light by rainbow color display (rainbow display) by sequentially changing the lighting color of the accessory LED 202 provided on the rendering combination 201 to emit light.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the specific effect is performed, the suggested effect that suggests the specific effect is performed. However, as the suggested effect, an effect that vibrates the push button 120 is performed. As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the vibration time of the push button 120 differs depending on which type of specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect A is executed, the push button 120 is used. The vibration time of is 1 second. Moreover, when the specific effect B is executed, the vibration time of the push button 120 is 3 seconds. Moreover, when the specific effect C is executed, the vibration time of the push button 120 is 5 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of executing a specific effect is higher than in the case of losing. When the rendition is performed, the degree of expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the specific rendition is not performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, it is determined that the ratio in which the specific effect B is executed is higher than that in the specific effect A, as compared with the case of the off. When a value is assigned and the specific effect B is executed, the expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the specific effect A is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the determination value is allocated such that the specific effect C may be executed only when the big hit occurs, and if the specific effect C is executed, the big hit It will be determined that Therefore, when the specific effect C is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than when the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where it is determined that a big hit will be made if the specific effect C is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect, even if it is the case The specific effect C may be executable at a low rate, and at least when the specific effect C is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit as compared with the case where the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed. It may be configured to have a high (big hit reliability).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, the big hit reliability is increased, or the big hit reliability is increased in the order of the specific effect C, the specific effect B and the specific effect A. Although the case where it shows is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, when the specific effect is executed, the reach reliability or the probability change reliability is increased, or the reach reliability or the probability change reliability is increased in the order of the specific effect B and the specific effect A. It is also good.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where there are three types of specific effects A to C as types of specific effects, is not limited to such an aspect, for example, only one type or two types of specific effects. It may be configured to be executable, or may be configured to be able to execute four or more types of specific effects. For example, a type of a specific effect may be provided that causes the character LED 202 provided on the effect role product 201 to emit light in the lighting color of blue or green.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the kind of specific effect and the vibration time of the push button 120 correspond one to one is shown, it is not necessarily limited to such an aspect. For example, even if the vibration time of the push button 120 is one second, it is not necessarily that the specific effect A is performed, and the specific effect B or the specific effect C may be performed at a low rate. You may configure it.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the vibration time of the push button 120 is made to differ as a kind of suggestion production is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, as the type of the suggestion effect, the strength of the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be made different or the vibration speed may be made different, or the vibration pattern may be made different (for example, the vibration operation of the push button 120 continuously Or may be intermittently oscillated or may be oscillated intermittently). In addition, the vibration time, the vibration strength, the vibration speed, and the vibration pattern of the push button 120 may be combined to constitute the type of the suggested effect.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, although the case where the presence or absence and the type of the specific effect and the suggested effect are different depending on whether or not the big hit is made, it is not limited to such a mode . For example, different specific effect determination tables may be selected according to the type of fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern command, and the presence or absence or type of specific effect or suggestion effect may be changed. In this case, for example, a variation pattern including Super Reach B is easier to execute a specific effect or a suggestive effect than a variation pattern including Super Reach A, or a specific effect or suggestion effect of a type having a high degree of expectation. It may be configured to be easy to select. Also, for example, a variation pattern having a larger number of pseudo-sequences than a variation pattern having a small number of pseudo-sequences makes it easier to execute specific effects and suggested effects, or selects a type of specific effect or suggestion effect having a high degree of expectation. It may be configured easily.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the suggestion effect is always executed when the specific effect is executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, in FIG. The specific effect D which does not accompany the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be provided. Further, not only the vibration operation of the push button 120 but also blackout display, turning off of the frame LED 28, and lighting of the button LED 360 may not be performed, or any one of these. It may be configured not to perform a plurality or all.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the case of collectively determining the presence and the type and the specific effects and the suggested effects in one lottery process is shown, but the specific effects and the suggested effects are You may comprise so that it may determine by separate lottery process. Then, by determining the specific effect and the suggested effect in separate lottery processes, a pattern that executes both the specific effect and the suggested effect, and a pattern that executes only the specific effect (the specific effect is not to be noticed too much It may be configured such that there is a pattern to be executed) and a pattern to execute only the suggested effect (a so-called pattern of pattern).

  Then, when it is determined to execute the specific effect (step S5005), the CPU 101 for effect control sets a specific effect execution flag according to the type of the determined specific effect (step S5006). For example, when it is determined to execute the specific effect A, the specific effect A execution flag is set, and when it is determined to execute the specific effect B, the specific effect B execution flag is set, and the specific effect C is When it is decided to execute, the specific effect C execution flag is set.

  FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 are flowcharts showing a process (step S802) during effect design variation in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not any one of the specific effect execution flags (any of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) is set (step S8106). If none of the specific effect execution flags are set, the process proceeds to step S8126. If one of the specific effect execution flags is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is time to start dark display (blackout display) (step S8107). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect symbol fluctuation start process whether or not it is the start timing of the dark display. If it is time to start the dark transition display (Y in step S8107), the effect control CPU 101 starts dark display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S8108) and the frame LED 28. Are all turned off (step S8109). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

  If it is not the start timing of dark display (N of step S8107), the CPU 101 for effect control checks whether or not it is the start timing of the suggested effect (step S8110). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect design fluctuation start processing whether or not it is the start timing of the suggestion effect. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the suggested effect comes at a timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the start timing of the dark display.

  If it is the start timing of the suggested effect (Y in step S8110), the effect control CPU 101 starts driving the vibrator motor 126 and starts the vibration operation of the push button 120 as the suggested effect (step S8111). . Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the vibration time according to the type of the specific effect in the vibration time timer for measuring the vibration time of the push button 120 (step S8112). For example, if the specific effect A execution flag is set, a value corresponding to 1 second is set in the vibration time timer, and if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is 3 seconds. Is set, and if the specific effect C execution flag is set, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the vibration time timer. Further, the effect control CPU 101 starts lighting display of the button LED 360 and starts lighting display of the push button 120 as a suggested effect (step S8113). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

  In this embodiment, the process of step S8113 is performed to light the button LED 360. However, the button LED 360 may be blinked, not limited to such a mode. Good. Further, for example, the button LED 360 may emit light in various lighting colors or may emit light in various lighting patterns, and the button LED 360 is drawn by a lottery process according to the big hit expectation degree, the reach expectation degree, and the probability change expectation degree. It may be determined in which lighting color or lighting pattern light is emitted.

  If it is not the start timing of the suggested effect (N in step S8110), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (step S8114). If the value of the vibration time timer is not 0 (N in step S8114), that is, if the push button 120 is vibrating, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the vibration time timer (step S8115) and performs subtraction. It is checked whether the value of the subsequent vibration time timer is 0 (step S8116). If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (that is, when the vibration time of the push button 120 is ended), the effect control CPU 101 stops driving the vibrator motor 126 and pushes as a suggested effect. The vibration operation of the button 120 is ended (step S8117), the lighting display of the button LED 360 is ended, and the lighting display of the push button 120 as the suggestion effect is ended (step S8118). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

  If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (Y in step S8114), the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect (step S8119). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect symbol fluctuation start process whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the specific effect comes at a timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the vibration time of the push button 120 is finished.

  If it is the start timing of the specific effect (Y in step S8119), the effect control CPU 101 starts the lighting display of the feature LED 202 provided in the effect combination 201 in the display color according to the type of the specific effect Then, the execution of the specific effect is started (step S8120). For example, when the specific effect A execution flag is set, an effect of causing the feature LED 202 provided in the effect combination 201 to emit light in a white lighting color is started. In addition, if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the effect of causing the feature LED 202 provided in the effect combination 201 to emit light in the red lighting color is started. In addition, if the specific effect C execution flag is set, the effect LED 202 provided in the effect role product 201 is changed in order and lighted by changing the lighting color to start the effect of emitting light by rainbow color display (rainbow display) Do. Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

  If it is not the start timing of the specific effect (N in step S8119), the CPU 101 for effect control checks whether or not it is the end timing of the specific effect (step S8121). In addition, it can be determined by, for example, checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect symbol fluctuation start process whether or not it is the end timing of the specific effect. Further, in this embodiment, after the vibration time of the push button 120 is ended, the start timing of the specific effect comes at a timing when a predetermined specific effect (in this example, 5 seconds) has passed. In addition, you may comprise so that the production | presentation time of specific presentation may not be limited to 5 seconds, for example, and may perform specific presentation over 7 seconds or 10 seconds.

  If it is the end timing of the specific effect (Y in step S8121), the effect control CPU 101 ends the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 9 (step S8122) and also displays the variation of the effect pattern. In response, the lighting display of the frame LED 28 is resumed (step S8123). Further, the effect control CPU 101 ends the lighting display of the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect combination 201, and ends the execution of the specific effect (step S8124). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the set specific effect execution flag (one of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) (step S8125). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

  In this embodiment, the case of ending the dark transition display (blackout display) or resuming the lighting display of the frame LED 28 at the timing of the end of the specific effect is shown. It is not limited to the form. For example, the dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 28 may be resumed during the vibration operation of the push button 120 or at the timing of the vibration operation termination. The dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 28 may be resumed at the start of the lighting display or the timing during the lighting display. Also, for example, the dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 28 may be resumed after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the specific effect is ended, and various modes are used. Conceivable.

  In addition, although this embodiment showed the case where the execution timing of suggestion production or specific production is the same irrespective of the kind of suggestion production or specific production, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, it is possible to execute the suggested effect or the specific effect at a plurality of execution timings, such as performing the suggested effect or the specific effect during high-speed fluctuation, performing it at the reach establishment, performing during the reach, etc. Good. Further, in this case, for example, the jackpot expectation degree, the reach expectation degree, and the probability change expectation degree may be made different depending on at which execution timing the suggestion effect or the specific effect is executed.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8126), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8127).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but fanfare production has not yet been performed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (discard symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311. Do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Note that whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received, specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, This determination can be made by checking whether a flag (small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start specification command has been received is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU for effect control 101 responds to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) for the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated (step S8311).

  Next, the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of suggestion production and specific production is demonstrated. FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode of the suggested effect and the specific effect. In FIG. 37, the display screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  As shown in FIG. 37A, in the effect display device 9, it is assumed that the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols is being executed, and the execution of the specific effect is determined at the start of the fluctuation. At the start timing of dark display (blackout display), as shown in FIG. 37 (2), dark display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 is started (see step S8108), The frame LEDs 28 are all turned off (see step S8109).

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, there is shown a case where the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 is completely darkened when performing the darkened display (blackout display), but it is limited to such a mode Absent. For example, even in the dark display (blackout display), the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is continuously displayed or configured to display some small symbols. The small symbol may be continuously displayed, or when it is configured to perform rightward display indicating a rightward operation, the rightward display may be continuously displayed. As such, even during dark display (blackout display), it may be configured to continue to display information necessary for the progress of the game.

  Then, when the start timing of the suggestion effect comes, as shown in FIG. 37 (3), the vibration operation of the push button 120 as the suggestion effect is started (see step S8111) and the lighting display of the button LED 360 is started, The lighting display of the push button 120 as the suggestion effect is started (see step S8113). In this case, when the push button 120 is vibrated, the member to be vibrated 303 inside the push button 120 is also vibrated, and the vibration of the member to be vibrated 303 is emphasized and visually recognized.

  Then, when the vibration time of the push button 120 ends, as shown in FIG. 37 (4), the vibration operation of the push button 120 as the suggestion effect is ended (see step S8117) and the lighting display of the button LED 360 is ended Then, the lighting display of the push button 120 as the suggestion effect is ended (see step S8118).

  Then, when the start timing of the specific effect comes, as shown in FIG. 37 (5), the lighting display of the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect role product 201 is started, and the execution of the specific effect is started (see step S8120) ). In this case, for example, in the case where the specific effect A is executed, an effect of causing the feature LED 202 provided on the effect role product 201 to emit light in a white lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect B is executed, an effect of causing the feature LED 202 provided on the effect-related object 201 to emit light in the red lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect C is executed, the effect of causing the rainbow LED display (rainbow display) to emit light is started by sequentially changing the lighting color of the feature LED 202 provided in the effect role product 201 and emitting light. Be done.

  Then, after the effect time of the specific effect (five seconds in this example) elapses, and when the specific effect end timing comes, the lighting display of the bonus LED 202 provided on the effect combination 201 is ended, and the specific effect is The execution is ended (see step S8124). Further, the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 9 is also ended (see step S8122), and the lighting display of the frame LED 28 is also resumed according to the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (see step S8123).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect device (in this example, the effect combination 201) capable of executing effects and the movable body (in this example, the push button 120) that can be operated Prepare. Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in the present example, a specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device, and it is possible to operate the movable body when the specific effect is performed. (In this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is executed). Therefore, the rendering effect of the specific rendering can be improved.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, since the rendering combination 201 as the rendering device is provided below the game area 7, the light emission of the feature LED 202 of the rendering combination 201 can be made to be noticeable to some extent. Before the light emission, the player does not know which area of the game area 7 to focus on, and there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect can not be obtained sufficiently. Therefore, in this embodiment, the push button 120 is operated to vibrate by operating (in the present example, vibrating) in the movable body (in the present example, the push button 120) provided in the vicinity of the rendering combination 201. By turning the eyes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the specific effect, and the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, “when specific effect is executed” is specifically the timing at which a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed after the vibration operation of the push button 120 is finished. Is to execute a specific effect. As described above, the specific effect may be executed after a relatively short time (1 second in this example) has passed after the end of the vibration operation of the push button 120, or the vibration of the push button 120 may be generated. The operation and the specific effect may be performed at exactly the same timing, or the vibration time of the push button 120 and the effect period of the specific effect partially overlap (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 is started, The execution of the specific effect may be started during the vibration operation). Thus, “when the specific effect is executed” means that at least the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the specific effect are performed even if the execution timing of the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the execution timing of the specific effect are identical or not identical. And may be executed at a timing that can be recognized as being executed correspondingly.

  Moreover, although the case where the rendering device (in this example, the rendering combination 201) is provided on the game board 6 is shown in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect combination used for the specific effect may be provided on the play space in the vicinity of the push button 120.

  Further, “in the vicinity of the movable body” means, for example, an area A where the effect display device 9 is provided, an area B where the effect combination 201 is provided, and a push button 120. If the region is region C, the distance between regions BC may be shorter than the distance between regions AB. With such a configuration, since the effect combination 201 is provided in a region where the distance from the push button 120 is shorter than the distance from the effect display device 9 where the player's eyes seem to normally face, It is possible to effectively guide the player's gaze.

  Further, “in the vicinity of the movable body” may be configured such that, for example, the distance between the regions BC is shorter than the size of the display screen of the effect display device 9. For example, when the size of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) is 15 inches (38.1 cm), the distance between the regions BC is configured to be less than 38.1 cm, It is also good. With such a configuration, the effect role product 201 and the push button 120 are disposed in an area narrower than the size of the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 that the player usually pays attention to. The line of sight can be effectively guided.

  Further, in this embodiment, as an aspect of the rendering device in the vicinity of the movable body, a case is shown in which the rendering combination 201 is provided relatively close to the push button 120 via the out port 26. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if it is on the game area 7, it may be configured such that the effect combination 201 is provided immediately above the push button 120, and as described above, the effect combination on the game frame near the push button 120 An object 201 may be provided. In addition, the movable body such as the push button 120 and the rendering combination 201 may be integrally configured. As such, “in the vicinity of the movable body” means that the movable body such as the push button 120 is provided at such a distance that the player's gaze can be guided to the specific effect using the effect combination 201. Good.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the rendering device used for the specific rendering is the rendering combination 201 provided with the feature LED 202 is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the specific effect may be performed in some form using a lamp / LED provided in a specific area as the effect device, a sub liquid crystal display device, or the like.

  Moreover, although the case where the movable body is the push button 120 is shown in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to include a movable member operable as a movable body within a predetermined operation range, and configured to perform the suggested rendering by operating the movable member provided in the vicinity of the rendering device. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the specific effect can be executed after the movable body is operated (in this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), FIG. 37 (5) Perform the specific effects shown in Therefore, the specific effect can be focused on before the start of the specific effect.

  In this embodiment, after stopping the vibration operation of the push button 120, a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses, and then the feature LED 202 of the effect part 201 is turned on and displayed to execute the specific effect Although the case of starting is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be ended after the item LED 202 of the rendering combination 201 is lighted and displayed during the vibration operation of the push button 120. Even with such a configuration, since the vibration operation of the push button 120 has already started before the start of the specific effect, the specific effect can be focused before the start of the specific effect. Further, for example, the feature LED 202 of the rendering combination 201 may be lighted and displayed simultaneously with the stop of the vibration operation of the push button 120 to start execution of the specific rendering, and various modes are conceivable.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the dark display (blackout display) in the effect display device 9 is started, the vibration operation of the push button 120 is started after a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be started simultaneously with dark display (blackout display) or turning off the frame LED, and various modes are conceivable.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the movable body is the operation means (in this example, the push button 120) operable by the player, and vibrates the operation means when the specific effect is executed (this In the example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is executed). In addition, the operating means includes a decorative member (in this example, a vibrated member 303 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3) capable of visually recognizing the vibration operation. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player's gaze to a specific effect by sight and touch.

  In this embodiment, although the case where the decoration member (in this example, the vibration receiving member 303) is included in the push button 120 is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the push button 120 need not necessarily be built in, and some decoration member may be provided in the vicinity of the push button 120. Then, for example, the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be transmitted, and the decoration member provided in the vicinity may also be vibrated. As long as the vibration operation of the push button 120 can be emphasized in some form as such.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the display means is displayed in a dark state when the specific effect is executed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37 (2), the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in a dark state) (Black out display)). In addition, the movable body can be operated in a state where the light emitter for presentation (in this example, the frame LED 28) is turned off (in the present example, as shown in FIG. 37 (3)) While the display (blackout display) is made and the frame LEDs 28 are all turned off, the push button 120 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively guide the player's gaze to a specific effect. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the effect display device 9 is displayed in a dark state (blackout display) and nothing is displayed, and all the frame LEDs 28 of the game frame are also turned off, the vibration operation of the push button 120 is performed. Can be made more noticeable, and the line of sight of the player can be effectively guided to a specific effect.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where all frame LED28 is light-extinguished is shown as a light-emitting body for presentation, it is not restricted only to such an aspect. For example, it is not necessary to turn off all the lamps and LEDs provided in the gaming machine, but some of the plurality of lamps and LEDs may be turned off, and one lamp or LED (for example, a light emitting area) May be configured to turn off only the lamps and LEDs that are particularly noticeable. In this embodiment, even when the frame LED 28 is turned off, the button LED 360 of the push button 120 is lit to emphasize the push button 120 when executing the suggestion effect. However, while the frame LED 28 is turned off, the button LED 360 may also be turned off.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the movable body is operated by a plurality of types of operation modes including at least the first operation mode (for example, the vibration time 1 second) and the second operation mode (for example, the vibration time 3 seconds). Is possible (see FIG. 33). The execution mode of the specific effect differs between when the movable body is operated by the first operation mode and when the movable body is operated by the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, vibration time 1 When the vibration operation of the second push button 120 is performed, the specific effect A is performed, and when the vibration operation of the push button 120 with the vibration time of 3 seconds is performed, the specific effect B is performed). Therefore, the operation mode of the movable body can also be noticed.

  In this embodiment, the type of the specific effect to be performed is different depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 120), but the present invention is not limited to such mode. . For example, the presence or absence of the execution of the specific effect may be different depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 120). As such, it is only necessary that the execution mode (the presence or absence and the type of execution) of the specific effect differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body in any form.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the display area is configured to be able to display a predetermined display in a predetermined area which is difficult for the player to visually recognize in the display area, and a visual line guidance effect for guiding the player's gaze in the predetermined area is displayed in the display area. It may be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which the line-of-sight guidance effect can be performed will be described.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, aspects of the effect display device 9 and the accessory 50 in this embodiment will be described. An accessory 50 is fixed to the game board 6 with a screw (screw), an adhesive or the like (not shown). The prize 50 is a member having an L-shaped cross section including a portion 50A protruding forward from the game board 6 and a portion 50B depending downward from the tip of the protruding portion (see FIG. 39 and the like). The accessory 50 covers the upper area 5B which is a part other than the lower area 5A of the display area of the effect display 9 from the front, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, by the portion 50B. Therefore, in the upper area 5B, when the player sees the effect display device 9 from the front (when viewed in the normal posture for sitting on a chair and playing a game) (when viewed in the first posture) It is a hidden area that can not be viewed unless it is hidden behind and invisible and the player does not look in from below (if the player does not take the second posture). The display area of the effect display device 9 is composed of an upper area 5B and a lower area 5A (an area that can be visually recognized when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the advance notice effect setting process is executed in the effect pattern change start process (step S801) of the effect control process process and it is decided to execute the advance effect, the effect pattern change start process The process table according to the notice effect is selected in step S8003 and the process in step S8005 of the effect pattern change start process and the process during effect pattern change (step S802) are executed according to the process table according to the notice effect During the variable display of the effect pattern, an advance notice effect for giving notice of the degree of expectation for execution of the super reach, the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the like is performed (see FIGS. 40 to 42). The notice effect is an effect of displaying a mini image, and the combination of the displayed mini images gives notice of the degree of expectation that the super reach is executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit. The advance presentation is performed before reaching the reach. In this embodiment, mini images A to C are prepared as mini images to be displayed in the notice effect (see FIG. 40 and the like). Each mini-image travels a different path (see FIG. 40).

  Regions Z1 to Z3 are set in the display region of the effect display device 9 as regions for displaying mini images (see FIG. 41 and the like). One mini image may be displayed in each area. The mini image moves in the area Z1 if the displayed area is the area Z1, and moves in the area Z2 if the displayed area is the area Z2, and the displayed area is the area Z3. If it is, it moves in the area Z3.

  The area Z1 is disposed at the boundary between the lower area 5A and the upper area 5B (see, eg, FIG. 41). Therefore, when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the mini-image displayed in the area Z1 (moving in the area Z1) is hidden behind the character 50 (part 50B) or from the back of the character 50 It appears and appears. The player sees such a mini-image, thinks that there may be something behind the character 50 (upper area 5B), and tries to peek at it (with the mini-image, the player's gaze is at the top Lead to area 5B).

  The area Z2 is disposed in the lower left area (lower left area) of the lower area 5A (see FIG. 41 and the like). The mini-image displayed in the area Z2 (moving in the area Z2) can always be viewed when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front.

  The area Z3 is disposed in the right area (the area toward the right) of the upper area 5B (see FIG. 41 and the like). Since the upper area 5B is an area hidden by the accessory 50, the area Z3 can not be viewed when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. The mini-image displayed in the area Z3 (moving in the area Z3) is visually recognized as the line of sight is induced by the mini-image displayed in the area Z1 (by the player looking from below).

  When only one type of mini-image is displayed, an expectation (probability) that super reach will be performed is foretold. Specifically, by displaying only one mini image A, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation that Super Reach A will be performed. Similarly, by displaying only one to three mini images B, the degree of expectation for executing the super reach B is notified, and by displaying only one to three mini images C, the super reach is displayed. The degree of expectation that C is to be executed is announced. As the number of mini images increases, the degree of expectation (proportion of corresponding super reach execution) is higher (confirmed by three).

  When multiple types of mini images are displayed, the jackpot expectation is foreshadowed. Specifically, the mini image A and the mini image B are displayed, the mini image A and the mini image C are displayed, the mini image B and the mini image C are displayed, and the mini images A to C are displayed. All will be displayed, and the big hit expectation will be foretold by each combination. When the mini images A to C are displayed, "big hit" is determined, and the probability of big hit is high in the order of mini image B + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C.

(Example of production screen)
Next, an example of the effect screen according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, in FIG. 41 etc., the downward arrow drawn in decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R shows that the decorative symbol is changing.

(Motion of mini images)
The mini images A to C displayed in the regions Z1 to Z3 move as shown in FIG. For example, the mini-image A reciprocates in the oblique direction (FIG. 40A). The mini image B moves so as to draw a square trajectory (FIG. 40 (B)). The mini image C moves so as to draw a substantially triangular locus (FIG. 40 (C)). Thus, the mini-images A to C have different movements. In addition, each of the mini images A to C performs the same movement regardless of which of the areas Z1 to Z3 is the display position.

(Example of the effect screen of the notice effect that makes the target of the expectation that super reach will be executed for the notice)
FIG. 41 (A) shows an effect screen when the preview effect for displaying the mini-image A in each of the areas Z1 to Z3 is executed. FIG. 41 (B) shows an effect screen when the preview effect for displaying the mini-image B in each of the areas Z1 to Z3 is executed. FIG. 41C shows an effect screen when the preview effect for displaying the mini-image C in each of the regions Z1 to Z3 is executed. In the notice effects in FIGS. 41 (A) to 41 (C), since three mini images are displayed, respectively, the decision of the execution of the corresponding super reach is notified.

  When the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front (hereinafter also referred to simply as a front view), the lower part of the area Z1 and Z2 are visible, but the upper part of the area Z1 and the area Z3 are in the upper area 50B. I can not see and hide in the character 50. Since the mini-image displayed in the area Z1 moves across the invisible upper portion and the visible lower portion, it hides or appears behind the accessory 50 (the downward extending portion 50B). The player sees the movement of the mini-image and looks at the upper area 5B (in particular, the area Z3) hidden in the accessory 50 in the display area of the effect display device 9 from the bottom (the player's The gaze is guided by the movement of the mini-image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, since the area Z3 can not be visually recognized when viewed from the front, a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z1 to Z3 and a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z1 and Z2 The appearance of the preview effect in the front view is the same (mini images are displayed in the area Z1 and the area Z2). For this reason, it is difficult to determine whether two mini images or three mini images are displayed (that is, whether or not the third mini image is displayed), and the player uses the area Z3 as a feature. By checking from the bottom of 50, it is checked whether three mini images are displayed (that is, whether or not the execution of the corresponding super reach is finalized). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

  Similar to the above description, the preview effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z1 and Z3 and the preview effect in which one mini image is displayed in the area Z1 have the same appearance when viewed from the front Therefore, the player looks in the area Z3 from the bottom of the accessory 50 to check whether two mini images are displayed (that is, there is a high possibility that the corresponding super reach will be executed). Check). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

(Example of the effect screen of the notice effect that targets the big hit expectation degree for the notice)
FIG. 42A shows an effect screen when the preview image effect is displayed in which the mini image A is displayed in the area Z1 and the mini image B is displayed in the area Z2. FIG. 41B shows an effect screen when the preview effect of displaying the mini image A in the area Z1, displaying the mini image B in the area Z2, and displaying the mini image C in the area Z3 is executed. In the notice effect in FIG. 42, since the mini images A to C are displayed, the big hit is determined.

  As in the case of FIG. 41, since the mini-image displayed in the area Z1 moves across the invisible upper portion and the visible lower portion, it hides or appears behind the accessory 50 (the downward extending portion 50B). The player sees the movement of the mini-image and looks at the upper area 5B (in particular, the area Z3) hidden in the accessory 50 in the display area of the effect display device 9 from the bottom (the player's The gaze is guided by the movement of the mini-image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

  As in the case of FIG. 41, the area Z3 can not be visually recognized when viewed from the front, so that the appearance of the notice effect in the front view is the same between the notice effect shown in FIG. 42A and the notice effect shown in FIG. (Mini image A is displayed in area Z1 and mini image B is displayed in area Z2). Therefore, the player looks in the area Z3 from the bottom of the character 50 to check whether the last mini-image C is displayed (that is, the variable display being executed is determined as a "big hit"). Check if there is). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

(Effect of this embodiment, etc.)
As described above, according to the present embodiment, a mini-image may be displayed in the upper region 50B (here, the region Z3) which can not be viewed by being hidden by the accessory 50 when viewed from the front (see, for example, FIG. 41). Then, the player looks into the upper region 50B by the movement of the mini image displayed in the region Z1 (hidden behind the character 50 or appearing from the back of the character 50, etc. FIG. 41 and the like). Thus, in this embodiment, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the upper area 50B (here, the area Z3) by the movement of the mini-image (hidden in the accessory 50 or appear from the accessory 50). , The interest of the game is improving. Note that such an effect of directing the player's line of sight (here, an effect by the movement of the mini image) is also referred to as a line-of-sight induction effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of mini images (in particular, mini images displayed in the area Z1 and the area Z3), and further, there are also a plurality of types of motion of the mini image (here, the mini image The movement differs depending on the type) (eg, FIG. 40). Thereby, the effects are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in this embodiment, since the mini-image displayed in the area Z1 constitutes the notice effect, and the expectation and the big-hit expectation at which the super reach is executed are notified by the type of the mini-image etc. The interest of the game is improved by focusing on the type of the mini-image (that is, the player also focuses on the aspect of the gaze guidance effect).

  In addition, since the anticipation of super reach is predicted and the jackpot expected degree are notified by the combination of the mini images displayed in the areas Z1 to Z3 (upper and lower area 50B) by the preliminary announcement effect, the player can A mini-image is searched over the display screen of the display device 9. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, by hiding the upper area 50B including the upper part of the area Z1 and the area Z3 with the character 50, the player is made to look down from below, so that the range of effects is expanded and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the appearance of the notice effect when viewed from the front (whether or not the mini image is displayed in the areas Z1 and Z2) can also be said to be the execution mode of the notice effect in the lower area 5A. ) Is not to know the content of the notice (in this case, the degree of expectation for the super reach to be executed and the degree of the big hit expected) that the advance notice effect in progress gives notice, the player confirms the area Z3 It is not possible to understand for the first time. Therefore, the effect of the advance effect is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that it is also possible to configure the gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment shown above. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the first embodiment to the configuration shown in the second embodiment, it is urgent to cover a part of the liquid crystal display device (effect display device 9) on the game area 7 A mini image such as a character image is displayed on the back side of the character 50 provided to be displayed, and a part of the mini image is displayed to protrude from the back of the character 50 (for example, the character image appears or disappears in the area Z1 , And the accessory 50 may be configured to vibrate and vibrate. In this case, (1) the character 50 makes the character 50 pay attention to the character 50 by oscillating movement, (2) then makes the character image displayed protruding in the area 1 make a focus, (3) next, the character The visual line of the player may be guided in stages in the order of focusing attention on the character image displayed in the area Z3 hidden behind the object 50.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo run (effect of temporary stop and re-variation of one or more symbols being executed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the microcomputer 100 for effect control showing the aspect to the effect control microcomputer 100, an example of transmitting one change pattern command when starting the change is shown, but the effect control of the change pattern with two or more commands is shown. It may be notified to the microcomputer 100. Specifically, when notified by two commands, before the game control microcomputer 560 reaches reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation, presence or absence of slip rendition as the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and as the second command after reaching a reach (such as reach type or presence / absence of re-lottery effect) (when it does not reach, so-called A command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode) after the second stop may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. . When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a first command has been transmitted, a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next The second command may be transmitted in the timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission may be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored as the variation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and normal symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result has been shown, It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. When the combination of stop symbols turns to a specific symbol combination when the symbol is turned and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prizes as gaming media, but is a type that encloses gaming media such as gaming balls and gives a score when prize giving conditions are satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the formula type.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is shown to be controlled to a definite change state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after completion.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a rendering device capable of performing rendering (for example, rendering combination 201), and an operable movable body (for example, Specific effect executing means (for example, microcomputer 100 for effect control) capable of executing specific effects (for example, specific effects shown in FIG. 37 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the push button 120) and the effect device Of the step S8120), movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for executing the step S8111 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, , Push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera etc.), and Corresponding specific display (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80 Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) for performing button (white) D 902 U, large button (red) D 903 U, stick D 904 U, etc. The body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is performed) And the specific display execution unit is configured to display the first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D 901 or the like) as the specific display and the player more than the first specific display. The second specific display (for example, the second with a high degree of advantage (for example, the expectation for the big hit expectation, the 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 49), the expectation for the probability variation big hit when there is a big hit and a definite variation big hit) 1 When the small display (white) D901 is used as the specific display, the second specific display includes the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display as the large button (white) D902 The second specific display can display the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the second specific display can display the stick D904 etc.) when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903. After the first specific display is displayed in the non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), the first specific display is displayed as the second specific display. After the small button (white) D901 is displayed after changing to the specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 74C), the small button (white) D901 is shown as FIG. Furthermore, the large button (white) D 902 is changed to the large button (red) D 903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I), and the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIG. In the indicated T11 to T13 and the like, the second specific display after change (for example, large button (red) D 903 and large button (red) D 903 U and the like as shown in FIG. 75 (J) and FIG. There is a gaming machine in which an operation effect using (for example, an effect of prompting an operation as shown in FIG. 75 (K) and notifying a result as shown in FIG. 75 (L)) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect of the specific rendering can be improved.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can improve the rendering effect, it is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.), which can detect the action of the player Means (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) and specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small buttons (white) shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80 Specific display execution means for performing D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.) (For example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) The specific display execution means, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901 etc.), and an advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation) The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white) D901 with high expectation for the big hit (see FIG. 49) and high expectation for the probability change big hit when there is a normal big hit and a definite change big hit) The second specific display is a large button (white) D902, a large button (red) D903, a stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is a large button (white) D902, the second specific display is a large button (red) ) When the first specific display is a large button (red) D 903 such as D 903 and stick D 904, the second specific display can display the stick D 904 etc.) by the detection means After the first specific display is displayed in a non-effective period (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. After the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in 74 (C), the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D 902 as shown in FIG. 75 (G), and then the large button (white) is displayed. White) change D902 to large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I)), and in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), An operation effect (for example, a diagram) using the second specific display after change (for example, large button (red) D 903 or large button (red) D 903 U, etc. as shown in FIG. 75 (J) or FIG. 75 (K)) Prompt operation as shown in 75 (K) As shown in FIG. 75 (L), there is a gaming machine on which an effect such as notifying the result is executed. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. Note that this other embodiment may be referred to as an "embodiment". FIG. 43 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 901 according to another embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal motorized product shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG.

  In addition, the game ball which has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. What is detected by the switches (a first start opening switch 9022A, a second start opening switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the "winning", winning to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as "starting winning", and in particular, winning to the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning. The winning of the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  While a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the first start winning (the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A), the first special view reserve memory number (described later ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the first special figure game executed on the first special symbol display device 904A (described later) or the decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 (described later) A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the second start winning (the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022 B), and the second special view reserve memory number (described later) Is a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") or less, a second special figure game (described later) executed on the second special symbol display device 904B or a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 (described later) A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. The occurrence of the first start prize even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize. If the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in an execution waiting state). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  In addition, although the 1st starting condition by a certain 1st starting prize is satisfied, the 1st starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 1st starting winning is not satisfied Variable indication corresponding to the 1st starting winning concerned Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated If the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in an execution waiting state). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start winning concerned with which the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  The number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the first special map reservation number, the second special image reservation number, and the total reservation number are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “the number of special image reservations” or “the number of reservation memories”. That is, when simply referred to as "the number of special map holding storage" or "the number of holding storage", one or two of the first special drawing holding storage number, the second special drawing holding storage number, and the total holding storage number Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a special variable winning ball device 907 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 907 forms a big winning opening that changes to a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 has a special winning opening door which is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 44, for example, and the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door. Change (open, closed).

  As an example, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 closes the special winning opening door when the solenoid 9082 is in the OFF state and closes the special winning opening, and opens the special winning hole door when the solenoid 9082 is in the ON state. The big winning opening is open. The game ball which has passed (entered) the big winning opening in the open state is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the special winning opening, winning to the special winning opening occurs.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening (detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023). The number of prize balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of the prize in the big prize winning opening is the number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first start prize, The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, three) is greater. That is, the state of the special winning opening (opened state, closed state) greatly influences whether or not the player has an advantage.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 902. The first special symbol display device 904A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The first special symbol display device 904A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special images") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "the first special figure" or "special figure 1", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 904A (same for the second special symbol display device 904B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each.

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 902 (the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) . The first hold indicator 9025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of first special view game holds) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. The second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible.

  When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”. Moreover, the expression "hold display" may refer to the display itself (display by LED) as well as the operation (lighting control of the LED by the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B) . For example, the pending display in the case of saying that the pending display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to the "hold display" in the start winning storage display area 905H (described later) and the "active display" (described later) in the active display area AHA '(described later).

  On the left side portion of the game area in the game board 902, a pass gate 9041, a normal symbol display 9020, and a general drawing reserve display 9025C are provided. The gaming ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by, for example, a gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. If the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021, the normal symbol display 9020 A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 9020 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc. in the same manner as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Note that a variable display game in which an ordinary symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or “normal drawing game”). In addition, the information regarding the common drawing game in which the common drawing start condition is satisfied but the common drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R are arranged. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction (correspondence) with the special symbol game, and the finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. . The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905L is also referred to as a left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905C is referred to as a middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905R is also referred to as a right symbol. The variable display of the decorative design is also included in the variable display game.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 905H, a hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning combination storage display area 905H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for a special drawing game increases due to the establishment of a new start condition, a new reservation is made so that it is sequentially digested from the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H (closest side of the active display area AHA '). You may add a display. When the number of reservations for a special drawing game decreases due to the establishment of a new start condition, the reservation display (the display from the oldest display) displayed at the left end of the start winning game storage display area 905H is deleted. When there is another hold indication, the other hold indication (each hold indication when there are a plurality of other and hold indications) is shifted to the left.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a display time display area, etc.) AHA 'is disposed. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a display at the time of digestion, a display this time, etc.) is performed based on elimination of the hold display from the start winning storage display area 905H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H is shifted (shifted) to the active display area AHA 'and the active display is displayed when the start condition is satisfied. Hereinafter, the active indication displayed based on the certain pending indication M being erased may also be referred to as the active indication corresponding to the pending indication M.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the active display area AHA ′ is disposed on the left side of the start winning storage display area 905H, but the active display area AHA ′ is any of the display areas of the image display device 905. It should just be arrange | positioned in the position of.

  An upper tray and a lower tray are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area. Attached to the member forming the lower tray is, for example, a stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 9031 B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 9031 A) on the front side of the upper surface It is provided.

  A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the speakers 908UL and 908UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and the speakers 908LL and 908LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper tray (upper left and right diagonal upper portions of the lower tray). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 908UL, 908UR, 908LL, and 908LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as the speaker 908.

  Inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 903 are provided movable movable objects (movable bodies) that operate as effects or decorations. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 43) to the second position (the lower position; for example, the position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 905) at the upper position of the image display device 905. A movable movable object 9017 is provided.

  In the inside and the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903, light emitting members (light emitters) for emitting light as effects or decorations are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the light emitting member 909 CC is installed on the movable part 9017, and the light emitting member 909 CL and the light emitting member 909 CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 905. A light emitting member 909 SL and a light emitting member 909 SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903 U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 909CC, 909CL, 909CR, 909U, 909SL, and 909SR are simply referred to as lamps 909, unless otherwise distinguished.

  Although the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the movable role object 9017 described above are effect devices for executing effects, the game machine 901 is, for example, a device having a vibrating portion, other effects such as a device having a blower portion A device may be provided.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 9020 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (common symbol per symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common symbol (per normal symbol)" It becomes ". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", the variable display result of the normal symbol is "general symbol lost (normal Design loss)). In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first special view game is started based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition, and the second start condition is established after the formation of the second start condition The second special drawing game is started based on the above. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is a loss. In addition, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as a predetermined display result.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols may be used as big hit symbols in the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

  After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning prize ball device 907 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The big hit game state in which the big winning opening is controlled to the open state is an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to a small hit gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 901 determines a round (also referred to as a “round game”) advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. Execute the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 901 changes the state (opened state, closed state) of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 in each round (each round). For example, the pachinko game machine 901 opens the big winning opening door at the start of the round, changes the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the big winning opening in the open state, and then closes the big winning opening door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is ended. Whether a predetermined winning opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening opens the special winning opening in the round, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings occur to the special winning opening The open state is maintained until one of the conditions is satisfied.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 repeatedly executes the round in the big hit gaming state until the number of times of execution of the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, even if the number of round executions has reached the predetermined upper limit number, the execution of the round is performed by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball does not win at the big winning opening). You may complete the The predetermined upper limit number of times is two types (eight times corresponding to 8R, 16 times corresponding to 16R in this embodiment), but may be one type or three or more types. May be

  In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R arranged in the display area of the image display device 905, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the special drawing game. In addition, a reach state may be reached in a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the variable display is ended by stop display of the finalized decorative symbol. With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that has not been stopped yet is displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. The effect in the reach state is called reach effect.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”).

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree by a certain production is, for example, (probability that the production will be executed at the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability of the presentation being performed at the big hit) × (probability of the big hit) It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than the big hit time) × (probability of not becoming a big hit). In addition, when a certain effect is executed, when it always becomes a "big hit", the big hit expectation degree of the effect is "1". The same is true for the super reach expectation degree by a certain effect.

  The reach production is a production that gives notice to the player that the big hit expectation is high, etc., but suggests the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the player that the big hit expectation is high in addition to the reach production, It is possible to execute suggested effects (e.g., hold effects, pseudo linked effects, etc.). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute an effect (for example, a hold effect, a slip effect, etc.) for giving a notice to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed. Hereinafter, a player may be notified of an indication that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, that the jackpot expectation is high, etc.

  In addition, the notification (prediction, suggestion) by the advance presentation effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed as long as it is performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" may be performed as long as it is performed before the finalized decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading preview effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as pending display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the pending information of the target It is also called variable target display. In addition, the active display (active display displayed during the variable display of a target) corresponding to the pending display of a target is also called the active display of a target.

  In addition, the display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of winning, or may be determined at the time of the pending display (before the active display is made yet), or when it is the active display (at the time of the change start) You may decide to Further, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active corresponding to the hold display (active display displayed by erasing the hold display) may be the same (or substantially the same), They may be related to each other. The display mode being the same (or substantially the same) means that, for example, an active display of the same or substantially the same display mode as the display mode of the hold display before the deletion is displayed.

  When the display modes are related to each other, there are, for example, three types of display modes (expected degrees of display mode a> expected degrees of display mode b> expected degrees of display mode c) as display modes of pending display. 3 types of display modes having different jackpot expectations as display modes of active display (expected degree of display mode s> expected degree of display mode t> expected degree of display mode u. However, display mode s is display mode a, display mode a, Unlike in any of b and c, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b and c). When the hold display is erased, the active display of the display mode s is displayed. When the hold display of the display mode b is erased, the active display of the display mode t is displayed. When the hold display of the display mode c is erased, the display It is that the active display of like u is displayed. In addition, when an active display effect at the time of addition described later is executed, when the pending display of the display mode a is erased, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed, and the pending display of the display mode b is erased When it is turned on, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as the pre-reading advance notice effect, the hold effect by the display mode of the hold display in the start winning game storage display area 905H can be executed. In the hold effect, for example, an effect (hold at the time of addition hold) to display a hold display to be added to the start winning memory display area 905H in a notice mode (blue or red in this embodiment) different from the normal mode (white in this embodiment) An effect (hold change effect) or the like for changing the already displayed hold display to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode) is included.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is an effect to be executed when changing the hold display to the notice mode as the pre-reading preview effect, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to directly display the hold display. It is possible to execute an effect to be operated indirectly (hold action effect. It may be referred to as “hold action success effect” in distinction from “hold action failure effect” described later). In addition, an effect (hold operation failure effect) that is executed when the hold display is not changed to the advance notice mode may be executable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA ′ may be executable as the advance effect (or the advance notice effect). In the active display effect, for example, an effect that displays the active display to be added to the active display area AHA ′ when the pending display at the time of erasing is the normal mode in the notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition) An effect (active display change effect) or the like for changing the displayed active display into a notice mode (including a change from a certain notice mode to another notice mode) is included. In the case where the on-hold change effect and the active display change effect are not particularly distinguished, they may be referred to as “on-hold change effect and the like”.

  Further, when the active display effect is executable, the hold action success effect is executed when the active display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to display the active display. It may be an effect to act directly or indirectly. Similarly, the pending action failure presentation may be presentation performed when the active display is not changed to the notice mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a concealment effect that conceals the pending display in the start winning combination memory display area 905H can be executed. Note that the concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the hold display. For example, in the concealment effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display at a position where even the number of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H can not be recognized at all (for example, an image for the cover is displayed on the front (upper layer) And it looks like a silhouette on the whole and is difficult to view, an image for concealment is displayed on the front, it is partially disturbed to make it difficult to see, and the holding display itself becomes hard to see (smaller, translucent) It may be an effect that makes it difficult or not (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface and is completely invisible, completely invisible by transparency or non-display). Also, the number of pending displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the display modes of those that are somehow recognizable (for example, recognizable by a silhouette). . Moreover, although the display mode is recognizable, it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the number. For example, the presence or absence of a pending display (for example, a red pending display) of a certain display mode may be notified. Also, in the case of a hold display in which the notice mode is expressed not in the whole but in a part (for example, the upper part), the concealment effect makes it difficult to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H. Or it may be an effect that makes it impossible.

  Also, the concealment effect may hide the active display in the active display area AHA 'instead of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning combination memory display area 905H.

  In the present embodiment, as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7”) that become the big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” When the special symbol indicating the symbol or the number of "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". Also, when the special symbol indicating the number of "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". After the end of the 16R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit, probability variation control (probability fluctuation control) is performed together with time saving control (time shortening control).

  By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" in the special figure game each time is improved to be higher than when the probability change control is not performed. The probability change control is one of the conditions when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the number of probability changes) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the variable display result is "big hit". End when it is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the probability change control is being performed, the probability change control finish. The predetermined number of times of ST is, for example, 70 times.

  Further, by performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the big hit gaming state is over, when a predetermined time-saving number of special drawing games are executed and the variable display result is a "big hit", either condition is established first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the predetermined number of time-saving special drawing games have been consumed. Note that the predetermined time reduction number is, for example, 70 times.

  When time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game by the regular symbol display 9020 (general drawing variation time) is shorter than that when the time reducing control is not performed, or Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the symbol is "per common drawing" than when time saving control is not performed, the variable display result is "per common drawing" in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on The game ball has a second start winning game such as control to make tilt control time to perform tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts than when time reduction control is not performed. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easy to pass through (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The short time state (high base state) and the high certainty state (probable state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A game state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control, that is, a game state in a high probability state (probability state) and also in a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability high base state or time reduction probability state Also called. The game state in which only time change control is performed and time reduction control and high opening control are not performed, that is, the game state which is a high probability state (probability state) but not a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability low base state It is also referred to as a timeless nondeterministic state. In addition, only the high certainty high base state (time reduction attached definite change state) may be called "probable change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control being performed, that is, a gaming state in which the high base state (time reduction state) is not a high probability state (probability state), is also referred to as a low probability high base state Be done. The game state in which time change control is not performed and time saving control or high opening control is not performed, that is, the game state in neither high probability state (probability state) nor high base state (time reduction state) is also referred to as low probability low base state Be done. The low probability low base state is a normal state in which neither probability change control nor short time control nor high open control is performed. Therefore, the low probability low base state is distinguished from high probability high base status, high probability low base status, low probability high base status, etc. It may be called "normal state". The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, the state after the initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, if the special figure game of the predetermined ST number (number of probability variations) is digested. Although the probability change control is ended, the probability change control may not be ended until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (number of probability changes). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided to continue the probability variation control until the next big hit. When providing a positive variation big hit that continues the positive variation control until the next big hit, a normal big hit may not be provided after the termination.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 44 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special figure or the second special figure. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the 909 and the movable part 9017 are mounted.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012, causes the speaker 908 to output sound. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012, the light on / off drive in the lamp 909 etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted. The character and article control board 9016 is a control board for character and article movement control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and drives the movable character 9017 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. A circuit or the like that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the main substrate 9011 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023, the game machine 901 is another switch (for example, a glass door (not shown) similarly connected to the main substrate 9011). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board, a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 902 itself, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, or a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 9011 includes a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, and a common view hold indicator 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 45 (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 45A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or more than three. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each production control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM90101, for example. When transmitting a certain effect control command to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer It may be stored in the buffer area that has been After that, the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 53) is executed, and the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012. Is transmitted.

  A part of FIG. 45 (A) will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of the first special view game. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. For example, as shown in FIG. 45B, the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “lost”, “16R positive variation big hit”, or “8R positive variation big hit”, or the big hit type Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

  The command B100H is a first starting opening prize notification command for notifying that the first starting condition is established (may also be referred to as a first starting opening prize designation command and a first starting opening winning command). Command B200H is a second starting opening prize notification command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special figure game by second special symbol display device 904B is established (second starting opening winning combination designated command , Sometimes referred to as the second start opening winning combination command).

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for reporting the first special view pending storage number. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for reporting the second special view pending storage number. For example, when the first start winning combination occurs (when the number of first special drawing reservations is increased), the first reservation number of prizes notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening prize notification command. Further, when the second start winning combination occurs (when the number of the second special view pending storage increases), the second pending storage number notification command is transmitted together with the second starting opening winning notification command.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of the big hit type as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a "variation category command") indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (FIG. 57), the variation category except for some cases (for example, when there is the first starting winning in the high base state etc.) when the starting winning occurs. The variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 'for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 9012 is performed. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 super-reaches the variable display based on the start winning based on the value set in the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 when the start winning occurs. It can be recognized whether or not.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random value counted (updated) on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 46, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 9011, a random value MR1 'for determining the special display result, a random value MR2' for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR3 'for determining the variation category. The numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 'for determining the common pattern display result and the random number value MR5' for determining the variation pattern is controlled so as to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 90104 may be any one as long as it counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1 ′ to MR5 ′. The CPU 90103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. 50, for example, to change the random number MR1 '. The numerical data representing a part of .about.MR5 'may be counted.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 47, the fluctuation category “PA1 ′” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA1′-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1 ′”. The fluctuation category “PA2 ′” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" and "PA2'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA2 '". The fluctuation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" and "PA3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3 '". The fluctuation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4′-1” to “PA4′-3” belong to the variation category “PA4 ′”. The fluctuation category “PA5 ′” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1" to "PA5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PA5 '". The variation category “PB1 ′” is a shortening / reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB1′-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB1 ′”. The variation category “PB3 ′” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" and "PB3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3 '". The fluctuation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB4′-1” to “PB4′-3” belong to the variation category “PB4 ′”. The variation category “PB5 ′” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1" to "PB5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PB5 '".

  A part of FIG. 47 will be described. For example, the variation pattern “PA3′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3′-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation pattern “PB3′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3 ′” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3′-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The variation pattern "PB1'-1" belonging to the variation category "PB1 '" is a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the variation pattern "PB3'-1". The variation pattern “PB4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  FIG. 48 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48, before the variable display result (special view display result) of the special view game is derived and displayed, the special view display result is a random number value MR1 ′ for special view display result determination. Is a table referenced to make a decision based on In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48, according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the determination values (special map display result determination) assigned to the respective special view display results (“big hit”, “lost”) The number of numerical values to be compared with the random number value MR1 'of. According to the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48, when the gaming state is in the high certainty state, more determination values are allocated to the “big hit” than in the low certainty state. That is, in the high certainty state, the probability of being a "big hit" is made higher than in the low certainty state.

  FIG. 49 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. When the jackpot classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 49 determines that the special image display result is to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit", it is for jackpot classification determination whether the jackpot classification is to be one of a plurality of types. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random value MR2 '. In the big hit classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 49, depending on whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing (that is, whether to execute the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game) Of the number of judgment values (numeric values to be compared with the random value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type) assigned to each jackpot type ("16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot") It is different. According to the big hit classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 49, when the variation special figure is the second special figure (when the second special figure game is executed), the variation special figure is more than the first special figure A lot of judgment values are assigned to "16R probability variation big hit" (than when the first special view game is executed). That is, in the second special view game, the probability of becoming the “16R probability variation big hit” is increased when the “big hit” is obtained compared to the first special view game.

  In addition, the ROM 90101 includes a variation category determination table to be referred to in order to determine the variation category to any of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern to be referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. A decision table is stored.

  The RAM 90102 holds various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply substrate.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control data holding area provided in the RAM 90102. The RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 50, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 50 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, a reserve specific information storage unit 90151C, a common view reserve storage unit 90151D, and a game. A control flag setting unit 90152, a game control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 90151A stores holding data (first holding information) of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the random number is made by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls With the numerical value data (for example, the numerical value data indicating random number values MR1 'to MR3') indicating the random number value extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like as pending data, the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example "4") I remember until.

  The second special view reserve storage unit 90151B stores reserve data (second reserve information) of the second special view game. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 90151 B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of gaming balls) to the second start winning opening, and random number is generated by CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the gaming balls Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") by using as numerical data (eg, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 'to MR3') indicating random numbers extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. Remember.

  The hold specification information storage unit 90151C is a winning order of the entire hold data including the hold data stored in the first special view hold storage unit 90151A and the hold data stored in the second special view hold storage unit 90151B. Hold data (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first start winning, or hold data based on the occurrence of the second start win (second hold information) Stores information indicating whether the In the suspension specifying information storage unit 90151C shown in FIG. 56, “first” indicates that the information is the first suspension information, and “second” indicates that the information is the second suspension information.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 90151D stores holding information of the common drawing game. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 90151D determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 9041 Numeric data indicating a random number value MR4 'for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, Second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number It is memorized.

  The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 90105 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 44 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining control contents of display operation in the image display device 905, etc., and a random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124, an I / O 90125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 90126 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating a rendering image to the image display device 905, and a information signal (rendering sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control substrate 9013 are transmitted to the rendering control substrate 9012. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 9012, a wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 9035A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, numerical data representing various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 44, in addition to the program for effect control, various data used to control the effect operation are stored. For example, the ROM 90121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations and settings.

  The ROM 90121 also includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable object 9017, etc.) Data to be configured is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. That is, various rendering operations are realized by setting a rendering control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. The hold control, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during opening and the effect during closing), the ending effect and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 51A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is, for example, control for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable combination control data, end code, etc. It may be configured from data, and the contents of various effect control, switching timing of effect control, and the like may be set in time series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. That is, determination values corresponding to the execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation are set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command has been received from the main substrate 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling an effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing or the like of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 908, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 908. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 909. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation of the lamp 909. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on the operation unit such as the push button 9031 B is effectively detected, and data indicating the control content of the rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. The movable part control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable part 9017. That is, the movable part control data is data for specifying the operation of the movable part 9017. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 51 (B) is a figure for demonstrating the various presentation operation performed according to the content of the presentation control pattern. The effect control CPU 90120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control for displaying an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905 is performed. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 908 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 909 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data An operation to the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is received in a valid period (which may be simply referred to as a valid period) to perform control to determine the contents of the effect. In addition, dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a rendering device that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the rendering control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 51 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, the present invention is not limited thereto, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol An effect control pattern may be provided to execute the effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period in which the advance effect is performed). Alternatively, to perform the rendering operation in accordance with a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or pattern data of the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, and the effect device (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp). 909, advance the control of the movable part 9017 and the like). In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable combination control data # 1 to movable combination control data #n are respectively effects The control content of the rendering operation in the device is shown, and rendering control execution data # 1 to rendering control execution data #n for specifying the execution of rendering control are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the sound control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the feature control board 9016 and the like. For example, in the display control unit 90123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, a predetermined VDP, for example, reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in VRAM. Let Further, in the voice control board 9013 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in voice RAM or the like .

  FIG. 52 (A) is a block diagram etc. which show the example of a structure of the data holding area for presentation control provided in RAM90122. In the RAM 90122, as an area for holding various data used to control the rendering operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a presentation control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. 52 (A) is provided. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 52A includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905, the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, etc. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 52 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. In the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total pending storage number are provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol specifying command, the variation category command The four commands of the pending storage number notification command (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) are set as one, and transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012. A storage area is secured in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A so that the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol specification command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands from the top of the free area of the start winning reception command buffer 90194A in the order received at the start winning. At the start winning game, command transmission is performed in the order of a start opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8”, the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation The category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. The command stored in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 52 (B) is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1” each time variable display of decorative symbols is started. Are deleted from the ones stored in, and subsequent storage contents are shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the preread notice buffer 90194B as shown in FIG. 52C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to respective data constituting the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A are provided in the prefetch notice buffer 90194B. That is, in the prefetch notice buffer 90194 B, the contents of the determination regarding the prefetch notice effect relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. . For example, when pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in start prize winning reception command buffer 90194A due to start of variable display of decorative design, etc. The content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, when the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start-up winning reception command buffer 90194A due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the read preview buffer 90194B, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the present embodiment will be described.

  On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be performed after the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop is performed.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to make the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, and the second start opening through the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by performing predetermined main-side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes predetermined information output processing to, for example, the jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 And other data are output (step S9013).

  Following the information output process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes a game random number update process (step S9014). In the gaming random number updating process of step S 9014, for example, at least a part of gaming random numbers (for example, random number values MR 1 ′ to MR 5 ′ and the like) used on the main substrate 9011 side is updated by software. As one example, the CPU 90103 may use software to update numerical data indicating game random numbers counted by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154.

  Following the game random number updating process of step S9014, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 904B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S9016). The normal symbol process processing is executed to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Enables tilting operation setting and so on.

  Following the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main substrate 9011 to a sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in I / O 90105, corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in game control buffer setting unit 90155, effect control After setting control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 9012, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S9015 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101 of the special symbol process process (step S9015) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S90101) shown in FIG. 55, the CPU 90103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). If it is determined in step S90201 that the first starting opening switch 9022A is on (step S90201; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the first special view reservation storage number (the first special view game suspension number) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90202). The CPU 90103 may identify the first special-image storage number by reading the first-storage number count value which is the storage value of the first-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90202 that the first special map storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90202; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer storage value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "1" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90207). Following the process of step S90207, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 56) (step S90208), and sets (clears) "0" to the start hole buffer value (step S90209).

  If it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is not on (step S90201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S90202 that the number of first special view storage locations has reached the upper limit (Step S90202 (YES)) After executing the processing of step S90209, the CPU 90103 receives a command from the second starting opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. It is determined based on the detection signal whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203). If it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the second special view reserve storage number (the number of reserve for the second special view game) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90204). The CPU 90103 may specify the second special-image storage number by reading the second-storage number count, which is the storage value of the second-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90204 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90204; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer stored value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "2" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90210). Following the processing of step S90210, the CPU 90103 executes start winning processing (FIG. 56) (step S90211), sets (clears) "0" to the starting opening buffer value (step S90212), and determines start winning processing Finish.

  When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is not on (step S90203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90204 that the number of second special view storage locations has reached the upper limit value. (Step S90204 (YES)), the processing of steps S90210, S90211 and S90212 is not performed, and the start winning determination processing is ended.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 55, even if the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 90103 first updates the number of to-be-saved special-character storages according to the start-up buffer value to be incremented by 1 (step S90215). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S90215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add one (step S90216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, may be updated so as to add one.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90216, the CPU 90103 determines a special figure display result determination random value MR1 ', a big hit type among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 90104 and the game control counter setting unit 90154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 'for random number and the random number value MR3' for variable category determination are extracted (step S90217). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the head of the empty entry in the special view storage section 90151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as storage information (step S90218). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ is set in the first special image storage section 90151A, while the starting port buffer value is “2”. At the same time, numerical data representing random number values MR1 'to MR3' is set in second special image storage section 90151B. In addition, information according to the starting opening buffer value is stored in the hold specification information storage unit 90151C.

  Following the process of step S90218, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning notice command according to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 9012 (step S90219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning notification command is performed. For example, the command command processing (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90219, the CPU 90103 executes a winning-time random number value determination process (step S90220). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command (step S90221). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second holding storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process ends. In addition, for example, the command control process (step S9017) of the timer control process for game control shown in FIG. 53 is executed after the special symbol process process is ended, for example, the pending storage number notification command set in step S90221 is executed. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart etc. which show an example of random number value determination processing at the time of a prize (step S90220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 57A, the CPU 90103 first identifies the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (step S90401). In the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is confirmed by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on (when it is off). Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is in the on state, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when in the off state). . Also, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state or the low probability state by confirming the state of the high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Good. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state when the high probability flag is on, and identifies the low probability state when the high probability flag is not on (when it is off). May be

  Note that the CPU 90103 sets the high base flag in the on state in the big hit end process (step S90117). The CPU 90103 also clears the high base flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process (step S90113). For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the number of time reductions in the big hit end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter if it becomes lost in special symbol stop processing. At the same time, the high base flag is cleared to the off state when the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches the number of time savings. The CPU 90103 also sets the high probability flag to the on state in the big hit end process. In addition, the CPU 90103 clears the high probability flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process. For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the ST count in the big hit end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter when it becomes lost in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches the high probability number, the high probability flag is cleared to the off state. The value of the fluctuation number counter is stored, for example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154.

  Following the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a big hit gaming state is currently in progress (step S90402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is specified in the process of step S90401 that the jackpot gaming state. If it is determined in step S90402 that the player is not in the big hit gaming state (step S90402; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether it is in the high base state (step S90403). In other words, it is determined whether or not the high base state is identified in the process of step S90401.

  If it is determined in step S90402 that a big hit gaming state is determined (step S90402; YES), or if it is determined in step S90403 that a high base state is found (step S90403; YES), the CPU 90103 indicates the starting opening buffer value. Is "2" (step S90404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start winning combination (the start winning combination where the variation special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S90404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90403 that the high base state is not set (step S90403 (NO)) or if it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S90404 (YES)), The CPU 90103 sets (selects) the special view display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90405). Specifically, when the CPU 90103 is not in the high certainty state, the table data for the low certainty state (when the value in the range of “8000” to “8329” is “big hit” is displayed from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special view display result is set, and when it is in the high probability state, from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48, the table data for high probability state (“8000” to “8818” The table data assigned to the special view display result whose range value is “big hit” is set In addition, when the high probability flag is in the on state, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state and the high probability flag If it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as the low certainty state, and the first special figure and the second special figure are different. When the display result determination table (first special view display result determination table, second special view display result determination table) is used, the first special view display result determination table is displayed when the starting opening buffer value is “1”. If it is used and the start port buffer value is "2", the second special view display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90405, the CPU 90103 has numerical data representing the random number value MR1 'for determining the special display display result extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S90406). For example, the CPU 90103 shows numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'and individual determination values assigned to the "big hit" special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405. The comparison is performed to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 '. Alternatively, CPU 90103 is the minimum value of the judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405 and the numerical data indicating random number value MR1 ′ (lower limit The value) may be compared with the maximum value (upper limit value) to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S90406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; YES), the random number value MR2 'for jackpot type determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. Based on the numerical data shown, it is determined the jackpot type (step S90407). Specifically, first, CPU 90103 responds to the fluctuation special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified by the starting opening buffer value. Set (select) the big hit classification decision table. Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets table data corresponding to the variation special figure from the big hit type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 90103, for example, compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type with the judgment value of each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table data set according to the variation special chart etc. Then, the jackpot type matching the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 'may be determined.

  Following the process of step S90407, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S90407 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90408). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S90406; NO), setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90409). It should be noted that the symbol designation command set in step S90409 is executed mainly by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 53, for example, after the special symbol process process is finished The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

  After executing the process of step S90408 or the process of step S90409, the CPU 90103 determines whether the high base state is set (step S90410). If it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is not set (step S90410; NO), that is, if the scene 1 or the scene 3 described above, the CPU 90103 is for the low base state according to the special view display result. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S90411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is present (step S90410; YES), that is, if the scene 2 or the scene 4 is present, the CPU 90103 selects the high base state according to the special view display result. Set (select) a variation category determination table for (step S90412).

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 58A shows a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the low base state. According to FIG. 58 (A), when the special figure display result is "loss" in the low base state, three types of variation category determination tables ("C-TBL1" and "C" in the figure are shown according to the number of pending storages). One of the variation category determination tables is selected from-TBL2 and "C-TBL3". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58A, when the number of pending storages is 0 or 1, the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" is selected, and when the number of pending storages is 2 or 3, When the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" is selected, and the number of pending storages is four or more, the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Further, according to FIG. 58 (A), when the special figure display result is set as the "big hit" in the low base state, one type of variation category determination table ("C-TBL4" in the figure, regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 58B is a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the high base state. According to FIG. 58 (B), when the special view display result is “loss” in the high base state, two types of variation category determination tables (“C-TBL1” and “C One of the variation category determination tables is selected from -TBL3 "). Also, according to FIG. 58 (B), when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" in the high base state, one type of variation category determination table ("C-TBL5" in the figure, regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a change category determination table. FIG. 59A shows the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIG. 58A or 58B. The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” of FIG. 59 (A) (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” of FIG. 59 (B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” of FIG. 59 (C), FIG. The same applies to the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D) and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” of FIG. 59 (E)) to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for variation category determination. Values) are assigned to multiple types of variation categories.

  For example, in the setting example of the change category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 59A, 0 out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random value MR3 ′ Are assigned to the variation category "PA1 '", 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are assigned to the variation category "PA2'", and 27 (in the range of "70" to "96" Value) is assigned to the variation category "PA3 '", two (values in the range of "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4'", and one (value "99") is the variation category It is assigned to "PA5 '". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 59A, the variation category “PA1 ′” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA2 ′” is 70% (70 (100). ), The fluctuation category "PA3 '" is 27% (27 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category "PA4'" is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category "PA5 '" is 1% (1 ÷ 100). Be done.

  The variation category determination table "C-TBL2" shown in FIG. 59 (B), the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" shown in FIG. 59 (C), the variation category determination table "C" shown in FIG. 59 (D) The same applies to the variation category determination table "C-TBL5" shown in FIG.

  It returns to FIG. 57 (A). In the process of step S90411 executed when it is determined that the high base state is not set in step S90410, the CPU 90103 determines that the special view display result is "big hit" in step S90406, the variation category determination table The table data making up "C-TBL4" is set, and it is determined that the special map display result is "lost", the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" to the variation category determination according to the number of pending storages The table data constituting one of the tables "C-TBL3" is set. Also, in the process of step S90412 executed when it is determined in step S90410 that it is in the high base state, the CPU 90103 changes the category if it is determined in step S90406 that the special view display result is "big hit". The table data constituting the determination table "C-TBL5" is set, and it is determined that the special map display result is "loss", the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" or the variation according to the number of pending storages Table data constituting one of the category determination tables "C-TBL3" is set.

  After executing the process of step S90411 or the process of step S90412, the CPU 90103 determines (determines) a variation category based on numerical data indicating a random value MR3 'for determining a variation category (step S90413). Specifically, CPU 90103 sets numerical data indicating random number value MR3 'for change category determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning processing shown in FIG. 56 and the change set in step S90411 or step S90412. It is only necessary to determine which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 'by comparing the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories in the table data of the category determination table. Following the process of step S90413, the CPU 90103 transmits one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 57B to the effect control board 9012 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S90413. After setting for setting (step S90414), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S90101), the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 (See Figure 54).

  The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is processing to be executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". The special symbol normal processing includes processing of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1".

  The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is a process that is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "1". The fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern, a setting process for transmitting a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command), and the like. There is. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is a process executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The special symbol variation process is a process of causing the special symbol to be varied (variable display) in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, and an elapsed time after the start of variation is a special figure variation time (FIG. 47) It includes the process of determining whether or not it has reached. In the special symbol variation processing, when the elapsed time after the start of variation reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process in step S90113 is a process that is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the process of stopping (deriving) the confirmed special symbol is displayed or the big hit flag is turned off. A process for transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as a process to be executed in the case where the game is executed (when it is determined in advance that the variable display result in the special symbol normal process (step S90110) is "miss") As a process to be executed when is in the on state (if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, it includes a setting process etc. for sending a hit start designation command (fanfare command) . In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the big hit flag is on, the special process process flag Update the value of to "4".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is processing to be executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing is a process that performs setting for opening the big winning opening (for example, setting of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the big winning opening door for opening the big winning opening, etc.) , And a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command and the like. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing in step S90115 is a processing that is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time or whether the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 9023 has reached a predetermined number, etc. A process of determining the timing for returning the winning opening from the open state to the closing state, and setting for closing the big winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 9082 for the winning opening door for closing the big winning opening It includes a process of setting a solenoid drive signal and the like, a setting process of transmitting a notification command and the like after opening the special winning opening, and the like. In the big hit open processing, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6".

  The big hit opening post process of step S90116 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is “6”. The big hit opening post-processing is processing to determine whether or not the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the maximum winning opening opening number of times, or when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value has not been reached The process to be executed includes a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command, and a setting process for transmitting a hit ending designation command as a process to be executed when the special winning opening opening frequency reaches the maximum value. It is. In the big hit opening post processing, when the number of rounds execution has not reached the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when reaching the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value Update the value of the special drawing process flag to "7".

  The big hit end process of step S90117 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is "7". The big hit end process is a process of determining whether or not the big hit end production waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending production) has elapsed, or a process to be executed when the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed It includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a high probability high base state, a process of setting the number of times of ST, and the number of times of time saving. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  In the big hit open process (step S90115), the big hit open post process (step S90116), the big hit open pre process (step S90114), the big hit end process (step S90117), when the count switch 9023 is turned on, the big win The transmission setting for transmitting a mouth winning notice command is included.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing (step S90110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 60, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the total number of pending storages is "0" (step S90230). For example, in the process of step S90230, the total suspension storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When the total number of pending storages is other than “0” in step S 90230 (step S 90230; NO), it is determined whether the pending data to be digested first (the pending data winning first) is the second pending information. It determines (step S90231). For example, in the process of step S90231, whether or not the information stored corresponding to the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 90151C is information indicating that it is the second hold information. It may be determined.

  When the hold data to be first digested in step S90231 is the second hold information (step S90231; YES), the hold stored in the second special view hold storage unit 90151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, a random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result and a random number value MR2' for determining the big hit type are read out (step S90232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90232, for example, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting 1 by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. Holding data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to holding numbers “2” to “4”) in part 90151B is one entry at a time (Step S90233). Further, in the process of step S90233, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specification information storage unit 90151C is shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90233, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter to be decremented by one. Following the process of step S90233, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S90234).

  When the suspension data to be first digested in step S90231 is not the second suspension information (step S90231; NO), the suspension data stored corresponding to the suspension number "1" in the first special map suspension storage unit 90151A Then, the special figure display result determination random number value MR1 'and the big hit type random number value MR2' are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting and updating the first pending memory number count value, etc. Holding data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to holding numbers “2” to “4”) in part 90151A is one entry at a time (Step S90237). Further, in the process of step S90237, the information stored in the entry lower than the pending number "1" in the pending specific information storage unit 90151C is shifted upward by one entry. Further, in the process of step S90237, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter to be decremented by one. Following the process of step S90237, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S90239). For example, the CPU 90103 may set the special view display result determination table, as in step S90405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes the special drawing based on the numerical data indicating the special drawing display result determination random number value MR1 'stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special drawing display result determination table set in step S90239. The display result is determined (step S90240). In the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 sets the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 'and the value set in step S90239 as in step S90406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. The special chart display result (“big hit” or “miss”) is made by comparing each determination value individually assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special chart display result determination table data. What should I decide?

  Following the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 determines whether the special-image display result determined in step S90240 is a "big hit" (step S90241). If it is determined in step S90241 that the game is a "big hit" (step S90241; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the on state (step S90242). The big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S90117. Following the process of step S90242, the CPU 90103 executes a big hit type determination process (S90244). The big hit type determination process of step S90244 is the same as the big hit type determination process executed in step S90407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S90244, the CPU 90103 is, for example, a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S90244. A big hit type buffer value is set (step S90245). That is, it stores what the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S 90244 is. As an example, the CPU 90103 sets "1" in the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process of step S90244 is "16R positive variation big hit", and if "8R positive variation big hit", the big hit type Set "2" to the buffer value.

  If it is determined in step S90241 that "big hit" is not made (step S90241 (NO)) or after the process of step S90245 is executed, the CPU 90103 displays the special figure display result determined in the process of step S90240, or In the case of a big hit, a determined special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in the process of step S90244 (step S90248). After setting the finalized special symbol in step S90248, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. .

  When the total number of pending storages is "0" at step S90230 (step S90230; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S90250) is executed, and the special symbol normal processing is ended. In the demonstration display setting of step S90250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration specification command for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 905 is from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 It is determined whether or not it has been sent. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (step S90111). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 determines a variation category as in the process of step S90413 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 57A, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation category A determination table is selected (set), and a variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when the CPU 90103 determines the fluctuation category "PA2 '", the CPU 90103 selects the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category "PA2'" shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating MR5 'is in the range of "0" to "39", the variation pattern "PA2'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "40" to "99", the variation pattern "PA2'-" Decide 2 ". Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category “PA3 ′”, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category “PA3 ′” shown in FIG. When the numerical data representing the numerical value MR5 'is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA3' -2 "is determined. The same applies to the case where other variation categories are determined.

  According to FIG. 47, FIG. 48, FIG. 58, FIG. 59 and FIG. 61 etc., the relationship between the normal reach and the jackpot expectation of super reach is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach. Also, in the normal reach, the probability of big hit is higher in the case with the pseudo-series fluctuation than in the case without the pseudo-series fluctuation. In Super Reach α (as well as Super Reach β), the probability of big hit is higher in the case with pseudo-stationary fluctuation than in the case without pseudo-stationary fluctuation, and when the number of pseudo-stations is two, it is one Expectations are higher than in the case.

  The random number value MR5 'for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the process, or in the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211) as in the case of the random number value MR3' for variation category determination. It may be extracted in step S90217 and used as reserve data, and may be read out in step S90232 (or step S90236) of the special symbol processing (step S90110).

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (the number of definite variations) and the set value of the number of time reductions of 70 are the same value (both 70 times). The number of times may be different from the setting value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variation) in the 16R probability variation big hit are the same value However, the setting value of the number of ST (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the number of ST (number of probability variation) in 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the time reduction number in the case of the 16R probability variation bigness are made the same value (both 70 times). The set value of the number of time savings may be different from the set value of the number of times reduced for the 16R probability variation big hit.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 62.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and installs it on the effect control board 9012. Performs register settings and the like for the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S9072; NO), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 occurs separately from the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but an interrupt occurs when using a CPU that does not automatically cause the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in I / O 90125, control to be an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from main substrate 9011 via relay substrate 9015. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When it is determined in step S9072 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag to be in the off state (step S9073), The command analysis processing is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  Following the command analysis process of step S9074, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process (step S9075). In the error notification processing in step S 9075, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is performed for an act of causing the game ball to be illegally guided to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process of step S 9075, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control process process (step S 9076). In the effect control process of step S 9076, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable role object 9017, etc.) are used based on the effect control command etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011. Judgment, determination, setting, and the like related to the rendering operation are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S9076, the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect random number updating process (step S9077). In the effect random number updating process of step S9077, for example, at least a part of effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 9012 is updated by software. As one example, the effect control CPU 90120 may use software to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 90193. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S9072.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 9011 has been described as an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving a rendering control command or the like may be generated in response to an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S9074). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 90120 first receives the command from the main board 9011 transmitted via the relay board 9015 by confirming the storage content of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90501). If it is determined that there is no reception command (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the command analysis process.

  If it is determined in step S90501 that there is a reception command (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502). . The effect control CPU 90120 may check, for example, MODE data of the received command, and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 45).

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90503). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set an initial timer value predetermined as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192.

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning notification command (step S90502; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the second starting opening winning notification command. Step S90504. If it is determined in step S90504 that the command is the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a second pending storage number notification waiting time (step S90505). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set, in the command reception control timer, a timer initial value predetermined as a reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command.

  If it is determined in step S90504 that the received command is not the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step S90506). ). If it is determined in step S90506 that the received command is not a symbol designation command (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a variation category command (step S90507). If it is determined in step S90507 that the received command is not a change category command (step S90507; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S90508). ). If it is determined in step S90508 that the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; YES), the first pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90509).

  If it is determined in step S90508 that the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the second pending storage number notification command. (Step S90510). If it is determined in step S90510 that the command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S90510; YES), the second pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90511).

  When it is determined in step S90506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S90506 (YES)), or when it is determined in step S90507 that it is a variation category command (step S90507 (YES)), step S90503, step S90505, After executing any of the processes of steps S90509 and S90511, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received command at the top of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A (step S90512). Following the process of step S90512, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90510 that the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is a fluctuation pattern specification command. (Step S90513). When it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; YES), the CPU for effect control 90201 stores the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90515). . Following the process of step S90515, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90513 that the received command is not a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 performs setting or the like according to other respective received commands (step S90518). For example, when the reception command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 may analyze the gaming state designation command to specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S90518, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S9076). In the effect control process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes an effect determination process at the time of winning (step S90150). In the prize effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the contents stored in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A, and determines whether the start opening prize notification command is received as a reception command or A process of determining various effects is executed.

  Following the effect determination process for winning (step S90150), the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative design in the device 905. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started (that is, when the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S 90171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 905 corresponding to variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B (for example, , Setting for performing display operation such as holding display, active display, etc. (for example, processing of performing effect control pattern corresponding to fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), setting of value of fluctuation time timer, etc.) And the like, etc. are included. In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S90172 is a process performed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". During the variable display effect processing, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting processing (step S90171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 special figure fluctuation time Processing to determine whether or not In the variable display effect process, when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The process for waiting for a special drawing in step S90173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." Special processing per wait processing is the processing to be executed when the finalized decoration symbol is "missing" When the variation gaming state setting process to set the gaming state of the pachinko machine 901, or when the finalized ornament symbol is "big hit" The processing to be performed includes processing for performing setting for performing fanfare production (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to the fanfare production, etc.). In the waiting process per special drawing, when the finalized decoration symbol is "loss", the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the finalized ornament pattern is "big hit", Update the value to "4".

  The big hit start process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not the big winning opening open notification command has been received, or a process being executed when the large winning opening open notification command is received, an effect being released (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect being released, etc.) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the open state. In the big hit start process, when the big winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The process in round of step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". Processing during the round is processing to determine whether or not the notification command after the big winning a prize opening has been received, and the processing being executed when the notification command after the big winning a prize opening is received is closed effect (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect being closed) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the closed state. In the process during the round, when the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-round process in step S90176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". The round post-processing performs processing during open processing as processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening open notification command or hit termination designation command has been received, or processing to be executed when the special winning opening opening notification command is received. Processing for performing setting (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or setting for performing ending effect as processing to be executed when a hit end designation command is received (for example, for ending effect) It includes the process of setting the value of the corresponding effect control pattern, the value of the ending effect execution time timer, and the like. In the round post process, when the special winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", and when the hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" Do.

  The jackpot end post-processing in step S90177 is processing executed when the value of the rendering process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end post-processing, whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S90176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after starting the execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time And the like are included. In the big hit end post processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning. In the effect determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 65, the CPU 90120 for effect control first checks the memory content in the start receiving winning time reception command buffer 90194A (step S90151), and designates the first starting opening winning combination designation command as a new reception command. Is determined (step S90152). When it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90152; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the second starting opening winning combination designation command as a new reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90154). If it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90154; NO), the effect determination process at the time of winning is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S90152; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a short time state (high probability high base state) (step S90155). If it is determined that the time saving state is not set (step S90155: NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a holding effect determination process (step S90160). In the holding effect determination process of step S90160 (the same as the holding effect determining process of step S90163), a process for determining a hold effect, an active display effect, an action effect (hold action failure effect, hold action failure effect etc), etc. include. Details will be described later.

  After executing the hold presentation determination process (step S90160), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determination content of the hold presentation determination process (step S90161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the contents of the process of determining the holding effect etc. in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 90194B corresponding to the buffer number of the start winning in the start winning receive command buffer 90194A. Remember.

  After executing the processing of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 adds a new hold display to the start winning storage display area 905H based on the determination content stored in step S90161 (step S90162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the start control memory display area 905H to display an on-hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described advance notice buffer 90194B. It is determined in the holding effect etc. determination process by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 etc. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of the addition is added to the start prize storage display area 905H. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  When it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received (step S90154; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability high base state) (step S90156). If it is determined that the time saving state (high probability high base state) is determined (step S90156: YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a holding effect determination process (step S90163). The holding effect etc. determination process of step S90163 is the same as the holding effect etc. determination process of step S90160.

  After executing the on-hold effect determination process (step S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processes of step S90163, step S90164, and step S90165, and ends the effect determination process at the time of winning. The processes of steps S90163, S90164, and S90165 are similar to the processes of processes of steps S90160, S90161, and S90162, respectively.

  If it is determined in step S90155 that it is in the time saving state (step S90155: YES), or if it is determined in step S90156 that it is not in the time saving state (step S90156: NO) (S90166). Specifically, similar to the case where it is determined that the hold effect is not performed in the hold effect determination process (steps S90160 and S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 displays the normal display mode (at the time of addition and after each shift) For example, information indicating white) is stored, and a hold display displayed in a normal display manner is added to the start winning storage display area 905H. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart of an example of the variable display start setting process (S90171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 so that the special view display result It is determined whether it is "" (step S90522).

  When it is determined in step S90522 that the special view display result is "loss" (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that constitutes the lost combination (the final stop symbol) Step S90524). As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 (for example, a random number value for left fixed symbol determination, a random number value for right fixed symbol determination, Numeric data representing a random number value for final symbol determination) is extracted, and a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a left final symbol determination table, a right final symbol determination table, a central final symbol decision table, etc.) stored beforehand in the ROM 90121 etc. By referring to etc., a decorative symbol to be finally displayed in a stopped state in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R is determined as a combination of finalized decorative symbols constituting a lost combination.

  When it is determined in step S90522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S90522; NO), that is, when the special view display result is "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)", for effect control The CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination (step S90528). As one example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value (for example, a random value for determining a big hit determination) updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193, and the ROM 90121 Etc. by referring to a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a big hit determination symbol determination table etc.) stored in advance as a combination of the decoration design symbols constituting the big hit combination, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R Decide on the decoration pattern that will be finally displayed stop. In addition, depending on which type of big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) is, and the presence or absence of the promotion effect, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decoration symbols that make up the big hit combination Good.

  After executing either the process of step S90524 or the process of step S90528, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a button development effect determination process (step S90529). The button development effect determination process includes a process of determining whether or not a button development effect (described later) is performed, and a process of determining a presentation mode of the button development effect when it is determined to execute the button development effect. Details of the button development effect determination process will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the reserve digest process (step S90530). Specifically, when the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA 'and there is another hold display in the start winning storage display area 905H, Move to the left about

  After executing the holding and digesting process of step S90530, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control pattern set process (step S90532). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation as a usage pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 as the usage pattern. Also, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process of step S90529 as a use pattern. That is, when it is determined that the button development effect is to be executed in the button development effect determination process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode (for example, button development effect pattern to be described later) etc. In the process of step S90532, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode or the like of the button expansion effect determined in the button expansion effect determination process of step S90529 is set as a use pattern. Thereby, in the variable display effect process (S90172), the display operation in the display area of the image display device 905 is performed according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command and the determination contents of the button development effect determination process (S90532) (See, for example, FIGS. 72 to 80).

  After executing the process of step S90532, the CPU 90120 for effect control sets an initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S90532 (step S90534), and starts the effect control process timer ( Step S90535) Control of the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 905 in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S90536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 47) specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S90537).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 digests the command stored in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194 A (step S 90538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the start winning winning reception command buffer 90194A, and deletes it. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S90538, deletion or shift of information stored in the prefetch notice buffer 90194B provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also performed according to command deletion or shift. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S90539), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  Hereinafter, the button development effect will be described in detail. The button development effect is an effect of changing (developing) an image (a button image imitating the push button 9031 B, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031 A) corresponding to the button etc. (push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A) . Hereinafter, an image corresponding to a button or the like may be referred to as a “button or the like image” or a “button or the like display”.

  The effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode of an image such as a button of one type (for example, changes the display mode (display color, display size) of a button image), or the button of one type as button development effect. The image is changed to an image of another type of button (eg, a button image is changed to a stick controller image).

  In the following description, a small sized white button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “small button (white)” or a “first mode” as an image such as a button. In addition, a large sized white button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “large button (white)” or a “second aspect”. In addition, a large-sized red button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “large button (red)” or a “third aspect”. Further, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031A may be referred to as a "stick" or a "fourth aspect".

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern in the present embodiment. The button development presentation pattern indicates a presentation mode (display mode) of the button development presentation. The button development presentation category is a name when the button development presentation patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the button development presentation category is a group name of each group including one or more button development presentation patterns categorized into common groups.

  In FIG. 67, "initial" is the initial display. "Final" is the final display. The “timing 1” is a first timing at which an image such as a button can change. The “timing 2” is a second timing at which an image such as a button can change. The “timing 3” is a third timing at which an image such as a button can change. Note that “timing 1”, “timing 2”, and “timing 3” may be different according to the variation pattern.

  Further, in FIG. 67 (also in the other drawings), “no change” indicates that there is no change in the image such as a button. "Weak change" indicates that there is a one-step change (one-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, "weak change (first → second)" is a one-step change from "first mode" to "second mode", that is, "small button (white)" to "large button (white)" Indicates that there is a change to The "weak change (second → third)" is a one-step change from the "second mode" to the "third mode", that is, the change from "large button (white)" to "large button (red)" It indicates that there is. "Weak change (third → fourth)" indicates that there is a one-step change from "third mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (red)" to "stick" ing. The "intermediate change" indicates that there is a two-step change (two-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, the "middle change (first to third)" is a two-step change from the "first mode" to the "third mode", that is, "small button (white)" to "large button (red)" Indicates that there is a change to "Medium change (second → fourth)" indicates that there is a two-step change from "second mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "stick" ing. The "strong change" indicates that there is a three-step change (three-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, “strong change (first to fourth)” is a three-step change from “first mode” to “fourth mode”, that is, change from “small button (white)” to “stick” Indicates that there is a

  In FIG. 67, the button development effect category “BH1” does not change an image such as a button at any of three timings (timings 1, 2 and 3), and “final” is “first mode (small button (small button "White))", is a button development effect category. The button development presentation pattern "BH1-1" belongs to the button development presentation category "BH1".

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1", the button etc. image does not change at any of timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3. Therefore, the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH1-1" is In both the first period (“initial”, ie, before “timing 1”) and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”) A period of 4 (“final”, that is, “after timing 3”) is also the “first mode (small button (white))”.

  The button development effect category "BH2" is a button in which an image such as a button weakly changes at any one of three timings and "final" becomes "second mode (large button (white))". It is a development presentation category. The button development effect category "BH2" includes a button development effect pattern "BH2-1" having a weak change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH2-2" having a weak change at timing 2, and a timing change that is weak at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH2-3" that has a change.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1", the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1 and does not change at timing 2 or timing 3. Therefore, the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH2-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In the second period (timing 3) and the fourth period (after timing 3), the second mode (large button (white)) is displayed.

  The button development effect category "BH3a" is a button in which an image such as a button weakly changes at any two timings out of three timings and "final" becomes "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development presentation category. In this embodiment, a button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and timing 3 and a button development effect pattern having a weak change at timing 2 and timing 3 in the button development effect category "BH3a" "BH3a-2" belongs.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1," the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1 and timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH3a-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In 2 "to" timing 3 ", the" second mode (large button (white)) "is selected, and in the fourth period (" timing 3 "and thereafter), the" third mode (large button (red)) "is performed.

  The button development effect category "BH3b" is a button in which an image such as a button changes in middle at any one of three timings and "final" becomes "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development presentation category. The button development effect category "BH3b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" having a middle change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH3b-2" having a middle change at timing 2, and a middle at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH3b-3" that has a change.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1", since the image of the button etc. changes in the middle at timing 1 and does not change at timing 2 or timing 3, the image of the button etc. by the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In the second period to “timing 3” and the fourth period (after “timing 3”), “third mode (large button (red))” is displayed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4a", the image of the button etc. changes in the middle in any of the two timings of the three timings, and the image of the button etc. weakly changes in the later timing. This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth aspect (stick)". In this embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4a" has a middle change at timing 1 and a weak change at timing 3 with the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" and a middle change at timing 2 and a weak change at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH4a-2" that belongs to.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1," the button etc. image changes in the middle at timing 1, weakly changes at timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" The button etc. image becomes the “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "third mode (large button (red))" is selected, and in the fourth period ("timing 3" or later), the "fourth mode (stick)" is performed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4b", the image of the button etc. weakly changes at earlier timings at any two timings of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes middle at later timings, and the "final" is This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth aspect (stick)". In this embodiment, the button development effect category “BH4b” has a weak change at timing 1 and a middle change at timing 3 and a button development effect pattern “BH4b-1”, a weak change at timing 2 and a middle change at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH4b-2" that belongs to.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1," the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1, changes in middle at timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" The button etc. image becomes the “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "second mode (large button (white))" is selected, and in the fourth period ("timing 3" or later), the "fourth mode (stick)" is performed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4c", the image of a button or the like strongly changes at any one of three timings (timing 3 in the present embodiment), and "final" is the "fourth aspect (stick) This is a button development presentation category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” having a strong change at timing 3 belongs to the button development effect category “BH4c”.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1," the image of the button etc. changes strongly at timing 3 and does not change at timing 1 or timing 2. Therefore, the image of the button etc. by the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is In the period 1 (before “timing 1”), the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”), and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”) (White)) ”, and the“ fourth aspect (stick) ”in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”).

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of button development effect determination processing (S90529). FIG. 69 is an explanatory view for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect and the like. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. In FIG. 69A (as well as in the other drawings), the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α (loss) (specifically, the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-1" " PA4'-2 "or" PA4'-3 ". The fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (loss) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1", "PA5'-2" and "PA5'-3") is there. The variation pattern "PB4'-X" is a variation pattern of super reach α (big hit) (specifically, one of variation patterns "PB4'-1", "PB4'-2", and "PB4'-3"). is there. The fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (big hit) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1", "PB5'-2", "PB5'-3") is there.

  In the button development effect determination process shown in FIG. 68, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the presence or absence of execution of the button development effect (S90550). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the button development effect at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 69A. .

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 refers to a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”. The table stores numeric values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect execution presence / absence determination (for example, random number values updated in the effect random number update process (S9077)), “No execution” and “No execution”. It should be allocated at a ratio of 5:95 to “present”.

  Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA 5 ′ ′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 10%. For example, the ROM 90121 refers to a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5′-X”. A numerical value to be stored and to be compared with the random value for determining whether or not to execute the button development effect execution may be allocated to the table at a ratio of 10:90 between “without execution” and “with execution”.

  In the effect control CPU 90120, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach ("PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5 ' Whenever the variation pattern ("PA1'-X", "PA2'-X", "PA3'-X", "PB1'-X", "PB3'-X") is other than "-X") Decide not to execute the rendition.

  According to FIG. 69 (A), when the button development rendition is executed, since it always becomes a super reach, the case where the button development rendition is executed is higher than the case where the button development rendition is not executed.

  Further, when in the low certainty state, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is performed in the super reach α is (probability of being “performed in“ PB 4 ′ −X ”) × (low certainty state” Probability of becoming “PB4′-X” at a certain time) / {(probability of being “performed” with “PB4′-X”) × (probability of becoming “PB4′-X” when in low probability state) It is about 18.5%, which is obtained from + (probability of being "executed" in "PA4'-X") x (probability of being "PA4'-X" in the low probability state)}. Note that the probability of being "execution" in "PB4'-X" is 15%, and the probability of being "execution" in "PA4'-X" is 5% (Fig. 69 (A)). Also, since the big hit probability in the low certainty state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 48), the probability of becoming “PB 4′-X” in the low certainty state is (1/199) × (30/100) The probability of becoming "PA4'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) .times. (2/100) (see FIG. 58, FIG. 59). On the other hand, when the super reach α is executed in the low probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit is “PB 4′−X” in the low probability state. It is about 7%, which is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB4'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA4'-X" when in the low probability state. From the above, when the button development effect is performed in the super reach α, the big hit expectation is higher than in the case where it is not performed.

  Also, when in the low certainty state, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is performed in the super reach β is (probability of being “performed in“ PB5′-X ”) × (low certainty state) Probability of becoming “PB5′-X” at a certain time) / {(probability of being “performed” with “PB5′-X”) × (probability of becoming “PB5′-X” when in low probability state) It is about 50%, which is obtained from + (probability of being "performed" with "PA5'-X") x (probability of being "PA5'-X" when in low probability state) ". Note that the probability that "execution is performed" in "PB5'-X" is 40%, and the probability that "execution is performed" in "PA5'-X" is 10% (Fig. 69A). In addition, since the big hit probability in the low certainty state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 48), the probability of becoming “PB5′-X” in the low certainty state is (1/199) × (50/100) The probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) .times. (1/100) (see FIG. 58, FIG. 59). On the other hand, when the super reach β is executed in the low certainty state, the probability of becoming a hit in the low certainty state is “PB5′−X” probability / (the low certainty state) It is about 20%, which is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state. From the above, when the button development effect is performed in the super reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the button development effect is not performed.

  Return to FIG. After executing the process of step S90550, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the button development effect in the process of step S90550 (S90551). If it is determined that the button development effect is not to be executed (step S90551; NO), the button development effect determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the button development effect is to be executed (step S90551; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category (S90552). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 69 (B).

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category “BH1” at a rate of 30%, and the button development effect The category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the button development presentation category " "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 10%, button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4′-X”. In the table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect category determination (for example, random number values updated in effect random number update processing (S9077)) are “BH1” and “BH2”. It may be allocated to "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c" at a ratio of 30: 20: 20: 10: 10: 10: 0.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA5 '-X", the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 0%, and the button development The presentation category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the button development presentation category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the button development presentation category "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 15%, button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach β (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". In the table, numerical values to be compared with random values for determining the button development effect category are “BH1”, “BH2”, “BH3a”, “BH3b”, “BH4a”, “BH4b”, and “BH4c”. It should be assigned at a rate of 0: 30: 20: 20: 15: 10: 5.

  According to FIG. 69 (B), in the super reach α, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH1” or “BH2” has a variation pattern “PB4”. The case of '-X' is higher than the case of the variation pattern 'PA4'-X'. That is, in the super reach α, the first mode (small button (white)) or the second mode (large button (white)) in the case where the image such as the button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick). Big hit expectation degree is higher than the case of staying in. Also, in the super reach β, when the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH4a" or "BH4b" or "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH2" is the variation pattern "PB5'-X" Is higher than the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the super reach β, when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick), the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second mode (large button (white)) stops. In addition, although the relation of the big hit expectation was explained as super reach β> super reach α, according to FIG. 69 (B), the case of becoming super reach β is more than the case of becoming super reach α according to FIG. The image of the button or the like is likely to change to the fourth mode finally. From the above, the jackpot expectation of the fourth embodiment (stick)> jackpot expectation of the third embodiment (large button (red))> jackpot expectation of the second embodiment (large button (red))> first embodiment (small button) (White)) It is a big hit expectation degree of.

  Further, according to FIG. 69 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a" is a variation pattern in the case of the variation pattern "PB4'-X". It is higher than the case of "PA4'-X", and higher in the case of the variation pattern "PB5'-X" than in the case of the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, when "final" becomes "third mode" by one middle change (two-step change) (BH3b), "last" is "third" by two weak changes (one-step change) Big hit expectation is higher than (BH3a) in the case of “embodiment”.

  Further, according to FIG. 69 (B), the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH4a" or "BH4b" is the case where the variation pattern "PB5'-X" is used. It is higher than the case where it is a fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the case where the “final” becomes the “fourth mode” by one strong change (three-step change) (BH 4 c), one weak change (one-step change) and one moderate change (2 The jackpot expectation is higher than the case (BH4a, BH4b) in which “final” becomes “fourth mode” due to the step change). Further, when the determination pattern of the button development effect category "BH4b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" is the change pattern "PA4'-X" in the case of the change pattern "PB4'-X" The variation pattern "PB5'-X" is higher than the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, if the "final" becomes the "third mode" in the order of weak change (one-step change) and middle change (two-step change) (BH4b), middle change (two-step change) and weak change (two-step change) The big hit expectation is higher than the case (BH 4 a) where “final” becomes “third mode” in the order of one step change).

  Return to FIG. After executing the processing of step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 determines one button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category determined in step S90552 (S90553).

  For example, when the button development effect category "BH2" is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command to be a fluctuation pattern "as shown in FIG. 70B. When PA4'-X "or" PA5'-X ", the button development effect pattern" BH2-1 "is determined at a rate of 36%, and the button development effect pattern" BH2-2 "is determined at a rate of 33% When the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 31%, and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", The button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a ratio of 31%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is divided by 33%. In determined, to determine the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" at a rate of 36%. For example, in the ROM 90121, a button development for super reach (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X" A presentation pattern (BH2-X) determination table is stored, and the table is compared with a random value for button development presentation pattern determination (for example, a random value updated in the presentation random number update process (S9077)) The numerical values may be assigned to "BH2-1", "BH2-2" and "BH2-3" at a ratio of 36:33:31. In addition, a button development effect pattern (BH2) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X" −X) A determination table is stored, and in the table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are 31 for “BH2-1”, “BH2-2” and “BH2-3”. : 33: 36 may be allocated.

  Further, for example, when the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command as shown in FIG. 70C. When it is "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" at a rate of 45% When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is decided at a ratio of 45%. The button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 55%. For example, in the ROM 121, a button development for super reach (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The effect pattern (BH3a-X) determination table is stored, and in the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are 55: 45 for "BH 3a-1" and "BH 3a-2". It should be assigned at the rate of In addition, a button development effect pattern for a super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X" (BH3a −X) A determination table is stored, and in this table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are allocated to “BH3a-1” and “BH3a-2” at a ratio of 45: 55 It should be done.

  When the button development effect category "BH1" is determined in step S90552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH1" is one type (button development effect pattern "BH1-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70A, the fluctuation patterns designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command are the fluctuation patterns "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5 '. Even if it is any of "-X", button development presentation pattern "BH1-1" is determined. When the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined in step S90552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH4c" is one type (button development effect pattern "BH4c-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the fluctuation patterns designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command are the fluctuation patterns "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5 '. Even in any of -X, the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" is determined.

  According to FIG. 70 (B), the determination ratio of button development effect category "BH2-3" to the determination ratio of button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". Is higher than the variation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". Further, according to FIG. 70 (C), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a-2" to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5 '." The case of -X is higher than the case of the variation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The same applies to FIGS. 70 (D) to 70 (F). That is, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the change is performed at the later timing than in the case where the change is performed at the earlier timing.

  Return to FIG. After executing the process of step S90553, the effect control CPU 90120 determines an action effect such as a button (simply “action effect” in the drawing) (S90554), and ends the button development effect determination process. More specifically, in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the mode of the image such as the button at each of the timings 1 to 3 (“no change”, “weak change”, “medium change”, “strong change” In accordance with), the presence or absence of an execution of an action effect such as a button (and the effect mode in the case of execution) is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 69 (C).

  In the following description, the effect (character appearance) in which the character appears is referred to as "weak action effect" as the button effect or the like performed in the image display device 905, and the effect (cannon) in which the bombardment with a cannon is performed It may be referred to as a medium action effect, and an effect with a lightning strike (a lightning strike) may be referred to as a "strong action effect".

  For example, when the change mode of the image such as the button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is “no change”, the effect control CPU 90120 makes 70% “action effect no” as shown in FIG. 69 (C). Determine the "weak action effect" at a rate of 20%, determine the "medium action effect" at a rate of 10%, and determine the "strong action effect" at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a change useless button etc effect effect determination table which is referred to when there is "no change", and the table is compared with a random value for the button etc effect determination. The numerical values may be allocated to “action effect nothing”, “weak action effect”, “medium action effect”, and “strong action effect” at a ratio of 70: 20: 10: 0.

  Further, for example, when the change mode of the image such as the button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is “weak change”, the effect control CPU 90120 sets “action effect nothing” to 20 as shown in FIG. Determine "weak action effect" at 70% rate, "medium action effect" at 8% rate, and "strong action effect" at 2% rate. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a weak change button etc. effect presentation determination table to be referred to when "weak change" is made, and the table is compared with a random value for determining a button etc. effect presentation The numerical values may be allocated to “action effect nothing”, “weak action effect”, “middle effect effect”, and “strong action effect” at a ratio of 20: 70: 8: 2.

  That is, in step S90553, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" is determined, timing 1 is "weak change", timing 2 is "no change", and timing 3 is "medium change". (Refer to FIG. 67), in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 determines “action effect absent” at a ratio of 20% with respect to the button etc. effect to “weak change” at timing 1, and “weak operation The effect is determined at a rate of 70%, the medium effect effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the strong effect effect is determined at a rate of 2%. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines 70% of “action effect none” at a ratio of 70%, and determines “weak action effect” at a ratio of 20% for button effects such as “no change” at timing 2. "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines “no effect effect” at a rate of 5% and determines “weak effect effect” at a rate of 20% for the button effect etc. with respect to the “intermediate change” at timing 3. "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 55%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, for example, when the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” is determined in step S90553, all the timings 1 to 3 become “no change” (see FIG. 67), but in the process of step S90554, The effect control CPU 90120 determines 70% of "action effect none" at a ratio of 70% and determines 20% of "weak operation effect" for button effects such as "no change" at each of timings 1 to 3. Then, "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%.

  According to FIG. 69 (C), when an action effect such as button effect (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong effect effect) is executed, the image such as button changes more than when it is not executed (weak change, medium change, Strong change) easy to do. In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, the image of the button etc. always changes (weak change, medium change, strong change), and when the medium effect effect is executed, it is more than when the weak effect effect is executed. Images such as buttons are likely to change (weak change, medium change, strong change). Also, when the strong action presentation is performed, the change is more likely to occur than when the strong action presentation is not performed, and when the medium action presentation is performed, the medium change is more likely to occur than when the intermediate action presentation is not performed, When the weak effect presentation is performed, the change is more likely to occur than when the weak effect presentation is not performed.

  As described above, in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), since the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect, etc. is also set as the use pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 performs button development effect Determination contents determined in the determination process (for example, (button development effect pattern), production mode of action effects such as buttons (“action effect none” in “timing 1 to 3”, “weak operation effect”, “middle effect effect”, Information to specify the other of "strong effect presentation" etc. is stored in RAM 90122 etc. In step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), RAM 90122 etc. are referred to, and presentation control corresponding to the presentation aspect etc. of button development presentation The pattern may also be set as a use pattern.

  FIG. 71A is an explanatory view for explaining various periods in the button development effect. Before describing FIG. 71 (A), “T1” to “T14” illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 80 will be described. "T1" represents the start timing of the fluctuation. "T14" represents the end timing of the change. "T2" represents the timing of reaching the reach. "T3" represents the timing of developing into super reach. Super reach developed from "T3" ends at "T13". That is, "T13" represents the timing at which the result of the super reach (such as winning or losing) is displayed (notified).

  "T4" represents the timing of the start of display of an image such as a button. An image such as a button displayed from "T4" is erased to "T13". That is, "T4" to "T13" are display periods of buttons and the like (display periods of images such as buttons).

  “T6” represents “timing 1” in FIG. "T8" represents "timing 2" in FIG. “T10” represents “timing 3” in FIG. “T5” represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change of the image of the button or the like at the timing 1 (T6) (change nothing, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. The effects such as the button started at "T5" end at "T6". That is, “T5” to “T6” are execution periods of the button etc. corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 1. "T7" represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change in the image of the button or the like at timing 2 (T8) starts the execution of the effect presentation. The effects such as the button started at "T7" end at "T8". That is, “T7” to “T8” are the execution periods of the button etc. action effect corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 2. “T9” represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change in the image of the button or the like at timing 3 (T10) starts the execution of the effect presentation. The effects such as the button started at "T9" end at "T10". That is, “T9” to “T10” are the execution periods of the button etc. effect corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 3. Note that "T11" and "T12" will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 71A, a part of the button display periods (T4 to T13) (T11 to T13) has a valid period (operation is valid) for the buttons (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A). And the other periods (T4 to T11) are ineffective periods (periods in which the operation is not effective) such as a button. That is, "T11" represents the timing at which the operation of the button or the like becomes valid. During the ineffective period (T4 to T11), a "restriction line" is displayed superimposed on an image such as a button as an image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. In addition, during the effective period (T11 to T13), the "control line" is not displayed. That is, the "regulatory line" is erased at "T11".

  A period (T13 to T14) following the button display period (T4 to T13) is a period for displaying the result (e.g., winning or losing). More specifically, when there is no operation during the effective period (T11 to T13), when the effective period ends (T13), an image such as a button is erased and a period following the display period such as a button (T13 to T14) The result is displayed in). On the other hand, when the operation is performed during the effective period, when the operation is performed, the image such as the button is erased, and the result is displayed from the time of the operation. If there is an operation during the effective period, the effective period ends when there is an operation. Note that an effect such as displaying an image such as a button or the like during the effective period (T11 to T13) and displaying a result (such as winning or losing) after the image such as the button is erased may be referred to as "operation effect".

  Each of FIG. 71 (B) to FIG. 73 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of a specific button development effect.

(Specific example 1)
FIG. 71B shows the flow of the button development effect in the first example. In the specific example 1, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". The effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH1" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH1. “1” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for the button etc. effect to the timing 1 (“No change in“ BH1-1 ””) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH1-1”) Then, "Weak effect effect (character appearance)" is determined for button etc. effect presentation for "No change" (S90554), and "Action for button etc effect presentation for timing 3 (" No change "for" BH1-1 ") It is assumed that "no effect" is decided. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” determined in the first specific example, the image of the button or the like is also displayed in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) and in the second period (“timing 1”) “Timing 2” / T6 to T8), the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), and the fourth period (“Timing 3” or later / T10 to T13) also have small buttons (white) (See FIG. 67), and in any of the button development effect patterns, in order to display the “control line” during the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in the first example, FIG. The button development rendition is executed like. Further, in the first example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for the timing 2 (no change), the character is made to appear in “T7” to “T8” but the image such as the button is not changed (Failure production).

(Specific example 2)
FIG. 72A shows the flow of button development effect in the second example. In specific example 2, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". The effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH2" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH2". 1) (S90553), "weak action effect" is determined for the button etc. effect for the timing 1 ("weak change (first to second in the case of BH2-1") "(S90554), timing "No effect presentation" is determined for button effect presentation for 2 ("no change" for "BH2-1") (S90554), button effect presentation for timing 3 ("no change" for "BH2-1") "Weak action effect" is determined for. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 72A, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” determined in the specific example 2, the button etc. image is “first mode (small button (white) in the first period (before“ timing 1 ”/ T4 to T6) And the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10) or the fourth period (“timing 1” to “timing 2” / T6 to T8). At timing 3 ”or later / T10 to T13), the“ second mode (large button (white)) ”is displayed (see FIG. 67), and in any button development effect pattern, the ineffective period (T4 to T11) In order to display a “control line” on the screen, in the second example, a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. Further, in the second specific example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 1 (weak change), the character is made to appear in “T5” to “T6” and an image such as a button is displayed in “T6”. The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to "the second mode (large button (white))" (changed by one step) (success effect). Further, in the second example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 3 (no change), the character is made to appear in “T9” to “T10” but an image such as a button is made in “T10” It has not changed (a failure production).

(Specific example 3)
FIG. 72B shows the flow of the button development effect in the third example. In the specific example 3, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH3a" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH3a". “2” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for button etc. effect presentation with respect to timing 1 (“No change in BH3a-2”) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH3a-2”) Then, "No effect presentation" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for "weak change (1st → 2nd)" (S90554), and "weak change (2nd → 3rd)" at timing 3 ("BH3a-2") “Weak action effect” is determined for the button etc. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 72B, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" determined in the specific example 3, the image such as the button has a first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) and a second period ("timing 1" to " In the “timing 2” / T6 to T8, the “first mode (small button (white))” is selected, and in the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “second mode (large Button (white)), and in the fourth period (after “timing 3” / T10 to T13), “third mode (large button (red))” (see FIG. 67), and any button development effect Even in the case of the pattern, in order to display the "control line" during the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in the third example, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72 (B). Further, in the third example, since “action effect non-existence” is determined for the timing 2 (weak change), the character etc. is not made to appear in “T7” to “T8”, and the button etc. It is changed (one step change) from the mode (small button (white)) to the "second mode (large button (white))". Further, in the third example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 3 (weak change), characters are made to appear in “T9” to “T10” and images such as buttons are displayed in “T10”. Change from “second mode (large button (white))” to “third mode (large button (red))” (changed by one step) (success effect).

(Specific example 4)
FIG. 73 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the fourth example. In the fourth example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4b" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH4b". Decide -1 "(S90553)," Weak effect presentation "is determined for button etc effect presentation for timing 1 (" Weak change (1st → 2nd in BH4b-1 ")" (S90554), timing "No effect presentation" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for 2 ("no change" for "BH4b-1") (S90554), and "intermediate change (second to fourth)" for timing 3 ("BH4b-1") It is assumed that "middle effect representation" is determined for the button etc. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 73A, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" determined in the specific example 4, the image such as the button is "first mode (small button (white)" in the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) In the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2” / T6 to T8) and in the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10) ”. Button (white)), and in the fourth period (after “timing 3” / T10 to T13), the “fourth mode (stick)” (see FIG. 67), and any button development effect pattern Since “control line” is displayed during the non-effective period (T4 to T11), in the fourth example, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (A). Further, in the fourth example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 1 (weak change), characters are made to appear in “T5” to “T6”, and images such as buttons are displayed in “T6”. The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to "the second mode (large button (white))" (changed by one step) (success effect). Further, in the fourth example, since "medium effect effect (cannon)" is determined for timing 3 (middle change), the cannon is made to appear in "T9" to "T10", and the button etc. The second mode (large button (white)) is changed to a fourth mode (stick) (two-step change) (success effect).

(Specific example 5)
FIG. 73B shows the flow of the button development effect in the fifth example. In the fifth example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X". Further, the CPU for effect control 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4c" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH4c". “1” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for button etc. effect presentation with respect to timing 1 (“No change in BH4c-1”) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH4c-1”) Then, "action presentation nothing" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for "no change" (S90554), and the button etc. effect presentation for timing 3 ("strong change (first to fourth)" for "BH4c-1") It is assumed that the “strong action effect” has been determined for.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” determined in the fifth specific example, the image of the button or the like has a first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) and a second period (“timing 1” to In the “timing 2” / T6 to T8) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “first mode (small button (white))” is obtained, and the fourth period At timing 3 "or later / T10 to T13), the" fourth mode (stick) "is obtained (see FIG. 67), and any button development effect pattern is ineffective during the ineffective period (T4 to T11). In order to display a “line”, in the fifth example, a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (B). Further, in the fifth example, since “strong action effect (lightening lightning)” is determined for the timing 3 (strong change), a thundercloud is made to appear in “T9” to “T10” and an image such as a button is displayed in “T10”. Change from the first mode (small button (white)) to the "fourth mode (stick)" (three-step change) (success effect).

  74 to 80 are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIG. 74 to FIG. 80, character C 901 is an enemy character appearing in super reach α and super reach β, character C 902 is an enemy character appearing in super reach α, and character C 903 is an enemy character appearing in super reach β. It is.

  FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 show display operation examples of the specific example 3 (T2 and subsequent ones) shown in FIG. 72 (B). Specifically, FIG. 74 (A) → FIG. 74 (B) → FIG. 74 (C) → FIG. 74 (D) → FIG. 74 (E) → FIG. 74 (F) → FIG. 75 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 75 (I) → FIG. 75 (J) → FIG. 75 (K) → FIG. 75 (L) → FIG. 75 (M). FIG. 74 (A) shows a scene (T2) which has reached reach. FIG. 74 (B) shows a scene (T3) in which the super reach α is reached. FIG. 74C is a scene (T4) when the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 74C, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901.

  FIG. 74D is a scene (T5) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 1 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, since the button etc. corresponding to the change at the timing 1, etc. is not executed, the display in FIG. 74 (D) is the same as in FIG. 74 (C) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 74E shows a scene (T6) where a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In the example 3, since there is no change at the timing 1, in FIG. 74 (E), the display is the same as that in FIG. 74 (D) (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C902).

  FIG. 74F is a scene (T7) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 2 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 2 etc. is not executed, in FIG. 74 (F), the display is the same as FIG. ing. FIG. 75G shows a scene (T8) where a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the third example, since a weak change occurs at timing 2, in FIG. 75 (G), the small button (white) D901 changes to a large button (white) D902 (one step change). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 75 (G), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

  FIG. 75 (H) shows a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to a change at timing 3 or the like, so in FIG. 75 (H), the character JS (code “JS” is not The image JS 901, which is illustrated, the same applies in the same manner, is displayed. FIG. 75I is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the third example, since the change is weak at timing 3, the large button (white) D 902 changes to a large button (red) D 903 (one step change) in FIG. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 75 (I), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (red) D903. Further, in FIG. 75 (I), an image JS 902 in which character JS is pleased is also displayed.

  FIG. 75 (J) shows a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 75 (J). FIG. 75 (K) shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 75 (J). In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the large button (red) D 903 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 75 (J) is displayed as the large button (red) D 903 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area. Note that in FIG. 75 (K), information (gauge, numerical value) may be displayed to notify the amount of the remaining effective period. The same applies to FIGS. 77 (K), 78 (E), 79 (E), and 80 (E). In FIG. 72 (B), for convenience of illustration, the position of T12 is described separately from the position of T11. The same applies to the other drawings in FIG. 71 (B) and the like.

  In FIG. 75 (L), the player pushes the scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13) or during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In specific example 3, since it becomes a big hit, character C 901 which is an ally character wins. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 (large button (red) D 903 U), the outcome (win of the character C 901) is notified. In FIG. 75 (L), it is described that the player does not operate the push button 9031B as T13. The same applies to other figures. FIG. 75 (M) shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG. 75 (M).

  FIG. 76 and FIG. 77 show display operation examples of the fourth specific example (T2 and subsequent ones) shown in FIG. 73 (A). Specifically, FIG. 76 (A) → FIG. 76 (B) → FIG. 76 (C) → FIG. 76 (D) → FIG. 76 (E) → FIG. 76 (F) → FIG. 77 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 77 (I) → FIG. 77 (J) → FIG. 77 (K) → FIG. 77 (L) → FIG. 77 (M). FIG. 76 (A) shows a scene (T2) which has reached reach. FIG. 76 (B) shows a scene (T3) in which the super reach β is reached. FIG. 76C is a scene (T4) when the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 76C, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901.

  FIG. 76 (D) is a scene (T5) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 1 or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, since the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button etc. corresponding to the change at the timing 1, etc., in FIG. 76 (D), the image JS 901 that the character JS prays as the weak action effect is displayed. ing. FIG. 76E shows a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In the fourth example, since a weak change occurs at timing 1, the small button (white) D 901 changes to a large button (white) D 902 (one step change) in FIG. 76 (E). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 76E, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902. Further, in FIG. 76 (E), an image JS 902 in which character JS is pleased is also displayed.

  FIG. 76F is a scene (T7) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 2 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 2 etc. is not executed, the display in FIG. 76 (F) is the same as in FIG. 76 (E) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C903). ing. FIG. 77 (G) shows a scene (T8) where a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 2 in the fourth example, in FIG. 77 (G), the display is the same as in FIG. 76 (F) (except for the operations of the character C901 and the character C903).

  FIG. 77H shows a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to change at timing 3 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, since the middle action effect (cannon) is executed as a button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3 or the like, the image TS901 of the cannon is displayed as the middle action effect in FIG. FIG. 77I shows a scene (T10) where a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the fourth example, since a middle change occurs at timing 3, in FIG. 77I, the large button (white) D 902 changes to a stick D 904 (two-step change). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 77I, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904. Further, in FIG. 77 (I), an image TS902 of the smoke of the firing gun and an image TS903 of the impact at the time of the hit are also displayed. In addition, when it does not change in a middle effect production (that is, when it is a failure production), for example, it may not fire, or it may not hit even if it fires.

  FIG. 77J shows a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) corresponding to the stick D 904 has become effective. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 77 (J). FIG. 77 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 77 (J). In order to urge the player to operate the stick controller 9031A, the stick D904 that was displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 77 (J) is largely displayed in the center of the display area as the stick D904U in FIG. ing.

  FIG. 77 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the stick controller 9031A during the effective period (T11 to T13), or the player sticks during the effective period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the controller 9031A ends. In the fourth example, since it becomes a big hit, the character C 901 which is an ally character wins. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) corresponding to the stick D 904 (stick D 904U), the outcome of the victory (the victory of the character C 901) is notified. FIG. 77 (M) shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG. 77 (M).

  FIG. 78 shows a display operation example of the specific example 1 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 71 (B). Specifically, the transition is as shown in FIG. 78 (A) → FIG. 78 (B) → FIG. 78 (C) → FIG. 78 (D) → FIG. 78 (E) → FIG. 78 (F) → FIG. Do. FIG. 78A shows a scene (T8) where a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the first example, since there is no change at the timing 2, in FIG. 78A, the small button (white) D 901 is displayed as in the timing 1 and subsequent ones. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 78A, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901. In the first example, although a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button etc. corresponding to a change at timing 2 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change), the change at timing 2 is Since it is not (that is, it is a failure effect), the image JS 902 to which the character JS is pleased is not displayed in FIG. 78 (A).

  FIG. 78 (B) shows a scene (T9) where the execution of the button etc. corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the example 1, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3 etc. is not executed, in FIG. 78 (B), it becomes the same display as FIG. 78 (A) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 78C shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the example 1, since there is no change at the timing 3, in FIG. 78 (C), the same display (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C902) as in FIG. 78 (B) is used.

  FIG. 78 (D) shows a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the small button (white) D901 is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 78 (D). FIG. 78 (E) shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 78 (D). In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the small button (white) D 901 displayed in the lower right of the display area in FIG. 78 (D) is displayed as the small button (white) D 901 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area.

  In FIG. 78F, the player pushes the scene when the player operates the push button 9031 B during the valid period (T11 to T13) or during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In the specific example 1, since it is a loss, character C902 which is an enemy character has won. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the small button (white) D 901 (small button (white) D 901 U), an outcome (win of the character C 902) is notified. FIG. 78 (G) shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The next variable display is performed immediately after FIG. 78 (G).

  FIG. 79 shows a display operation example of the specific example 2 (T8 and subsequent ones) shown in FIG. 72 (A). Specifically, the transition is as shown in FIG. 79 (A) → FIG. 79 (B) → FIG. 79 (C) → FIG. 79 (D) → FIG. 79 (E) → FIG. 79 (F) → FIG. 79 (G) Do. FIG. 79A shows a scene (T8) where a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the second example, since there is no change in the timing 2, in FIG. 79A, the large button (white) D 902 is displayed as in the timing 1 and subsequent ones. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 79A, the restriction line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

  FIG. 79 (B) shows a scene (T9) where the execution of the button etc. corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the second example, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3 etc., so in FIG. 79 (B), the image JS 901 prayed by the character JS is displayed as the weak action effect. ing. FIG. 79C shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 3 in the second example, in FIG. 79 (C), the display is the same as in FIG. 79 (B) (except for the operations of the character C901 and the character C902). Since the effect is a failure effect, the image JS 902 to which the character JS is pleased is not displayed in FIG. 79 (C).

  FIG. 79D shows a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (white) D902 has become effective. Since the effective period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 79 (D). FIG. 79E is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 79D. In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the large button (white) D 902 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 79D is displayed as the large button (white) D 902 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area.

  FIG. 79F shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes the player during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In the second example, the enemy character C902 wins because it is a loss. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 (large button (white) D 902 U), the outcome (win of the character C 902) is notified. FIG. 79G shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The following variable display is performed immediately after FIG. 79 (G).

  FIG. 80 shows a display operation example of the specific example 5 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 73 (B). Specifically, transition as in FIG. 80 (A) → FIG. 80 (B) → FIG. 80 (C) → FIG. 80 (D) → FIG. 80 (E) → FIG. 80 (F) → FIG. 80 (G) Do. FIG. 80A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the second example, the small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. 80 (A) as in the timing 1 and thereafter. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 80 (A), the restriction line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

  FIG. 80 (B) shows a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 is started. In the fifth example, a strong action effect (strike) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to a change at timing 3 or the like, so in FIG. 80 (B), the thundercloud image KS 901 is displayed as a strong action effect. FIG. 80 (C) shows a scene (T10) where a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the fifth example, since a strong change occurs at timing 3, in FIG. 80C, the small button (white) D 901 changes to a stick D 904 (three-step change). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 80 (C), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904. Further, in FIG. 80C, an image KS 902 of a lightning bolt and an image KS 903 of an impact at the time of hitting are also displayed. According to FIG. 69 (C), although a change is always performed in the strong action production, if there is no change in the strong action production (that is, if it is a failure effect), for example, there is no lightning strike or a lightning strike You may not try to hit it.

  Since FIGS. 80D to 80G are similar to FIGS. 77J to 77M, the description will be omitted.

  Note that the player may be required to perform a continuous hit operation (described later) or a long press operation (described later) as the operation during the effective period (T11 to T13). In addition, during the effective period (T11 to T13), an auto button or an automatic continuous hitting function described below may be enabled.

(About auto button, auto double hit)
Subsequently, the auto button will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button (described later) before executing the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning in the effect control process (S9076). The auto button setting process of may be executed. That is, in the effect control process (S9076), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the auto button setting process, and then executes the effect determination process at winning (S90150), and then, the effect control flag setting unit 90191, etc. Depending on the value of the rendering process flag provided in any one of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 can be selected and executed. The auto button setting process may be performed regardless of the value of the rendering process flag, and for example, the auto button setting may be performed after the winning combination rendering process (S90150) is performed in the rendering control process (S9076). The process may be executed, or the automatic button setting process may be executed before the effect control process (S9076) is performed in the effect control main process (FIG. 62).

  In the following description, the button advance notice is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the notice is displayed based on the detection of the single-shot operation or the continuous hitting operation of the button etc. (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) in the button advance effect. Shall be displayed. The "single-shot operation" means that a button or the like is operated once, and the "continuous hitting operation" means that the button or the like is operated a plurality of times consecutively.

  In addition, the button advance presentation effect is the button development presentation described above, and the result (superiority etc.) of the super reach is displayed based on the detection of a single-shot operation such as a button or the continuous hitting operation in the button development presentation (during the effective period). May be

  Also, with the "auto button", the player actually executes the processing assuming that the button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) is not operated, but the button or the like is operated. It is. That is, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, even if the button or the like is not operated, the processing is executed on the assumption that the button or the like is operated one by one or continuously hit, and the advance notice is displayed.

  In addition, with “automatic consecutive strikes”, the player continues to operate the button etc. (for example, long press on the push button 9031 B, long stick on the stick controller 9031 A, etc.) There are also cases where it is referred to as “push operation”), but the button or the like is operated a plurality of times continuously (for example, the continuous hitting of the push button 9031B, the operation of continuously pulling the stick controller 9031A, etc.) It is a function to detect as. That is, when the function of automatic continuous hitting is set to be effective, even if the button etc. is not operated a plurality of times consecutively, the processing is executed assuming that the button etc. is operated continuously and a notice display is displayed. Do.

  Moreover, although one type may be sufficient as button advance production | presentation, multiple types may be sufficient as it. Hereinafter, it is assumed that a button preview effect A, a button preview effect B, and a button preview effect C) are prepared as a plurality of types of button preview effects. For example, when the effective period is started, button display effect A and button display effect B display a gauge display according to the number of times of operation of push button 9031 B, and whenever an operation of push button 9031 B is detected, gauge display The display is updated in such a manner that the scale of 1 has decreased by one, and when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number of times (that is, the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied. It is like displaying a notice display (for example, a character string such as “excessive heat!” Or “chance!”). In addition, for example, when the operation of the push button 9031B is detected once during the effective period, the button announcement effect C determines that the operation condition is satisfied, and displays an announcement (for example, the character A or the character B). It is like doing.

  In the following description, in addition to the button advance notice effect, the back button advance notice effect is provided in which the light emitting member 909 CC or the like is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode based on detection of the operation of the button or the like during the effective period. Do. In the button preview effect, when the effective period is started, a notification to indicate that the operation is effective or to prompt the operation is performed, while in the back button preview effect, the effective period (hereinafter, effective in the button preview effect) In order to distinguish it from the period, even when the special effective period may be called), notification that the operation is effective or indicating that the operation is effective is not performed. Therefore, there is a fun way to search for and execute a special effective period in the back button advance notice effect. From this characteristic of the back button advance notice effect, in the present embodiment, even if the function of the auto button is set to be effective, the back button advance notice is performed unless an operation such as a button is detected in the special effective period. Control is not performed to cause the light emitting members 909 CC and the like to emit light in a predetermined mode by the effect.

  In this embodiment, the auto button setting process is executed to execute an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during demonstration screen display, a period during which variable display of a decorative symbol is performed, a period during big hit game) It becomes possible to set whether the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled based on the operation of the button or the like. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the setting of the auto button by the auto button setting process, the setting of the auto button can also be performed from the setting menu (menu screen on which setting of background image, volume, brightness etc. is possible). I assume. In the present embodiment, the auto-continuous hitting function is always enabled, but, like the auto button function, it may be possible to set whether to enable or disable.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the auto button setting process. In FIG. 81 (also in FIGS. 82 and 83), the operation of the push button 9031B is described as the operation of the button or the like, but the same applies to the stick controller 9031A.

  In the auto button setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not an auto button valid flag indicating that the function of the auto button is valid is set (step S907101).

  When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is not set (step S907101; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 sets an operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the button advance effect is in the valid period. It is checked whether or not it is (step S907102). If the flag is set during the operation valid period (step S907102; YES), the auto button setting process is ended.

  If it is determined that the flag is not set during the operation effective period (step S907102; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907103) . If the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is not detected (step S 907 103; NO), the auto button setting process is ended. As to whether or not the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, for example, in the timer interruption, the operation detection flag is set when the press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, and the operation detection is performed when the press operation is not detected. The flag is configured to be reset, and it is determined that the long press operation is detected when the operation detection flag is set and the state where the press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected continues for a predetermined period. You may do so.

  If the long press operation of the push button is detected (step S907103; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets an auto button valid flag (step S907104).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 5 to display an auto button valid display indicating that the function of the auto button is valid (step S907105). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to output an auto button effective sound indicating that the function of the auto button is effective (step S907106). In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 has the auto button function set to be different from that for the normal light emission mode (for example, emitting light in white) for the push button LED (LED provided to the push button 9031 B) Is controlled to emit light according to a special light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) for notifying (step S907107).

  If it is determined that the auto button valid flag is set (step S 907 101; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 has a special operation valid period flag indicating that it is in the valid period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect. It is checked whether it is set (step S907108). If the special operation valid period flag is set (step S907108; YES), the auto button setting process is ended.

  If it is determined that the flag is not set during the special operation effective period (step S907108; NO), whether or not the setting menu displaying flag indicating that the setting menu is being displayed is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step S907109), and if it is set (step S907109); YES, the auto button setting process is ended.

  When the setting menu display flag is not set (step S907109; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control checks whether or not the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907110). If the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is not detected, the auto button setting process is ended.

  If the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is detected (step S 907 110; YES), the effect control CPU 90 120 resets the auto button valid flag (step S 907 111).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display an auto button invalidation display indicating that the function of the auto button is invalid (step S907112). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to output an auto button invalidation effect sound (effect sound different from the above-described auto button effective effect sound) indicating that the function of the auto button is ineffective (step S907113). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to cause the push button LED to emit light in the normal light emission mode (step S907114).

  The auto button setting process has been described above with reference to FIG. 81. However, by executing the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 81, the function of the auto button can be set to be valid or invalid at an arbitrary timing. Specifically, the player can set the auto button function to be effective by performing the long press operation on the push button 9031 B while the function of the auto button is invalid (see steps S 907 101, S 907 103, and S 907 104). The auto button function can be set to be invalidated by pressing the push button 9031 B (single-shot operation) while the auto button function is enabled (see steps S 907 101, S 907 110, and S 907 111). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function not only during the demonstration screen display but also during the period during which the decorative symbol is variably displayed or during the big hit game. it can. That is, the setting of the auto button function can be easily changed without interrupting the game once, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by the interruption.

  However, in the present embodiment, a period in which the setting change of the auto button function is not received exceptionally is provided. For example, when the function of the auto button is invalidated, the long press operation may be performed to display the advance notice display during the effective period in the button advance effect, but the function of the auto button is performed according to the long press operation. When the setting of is changed, the setting change which the player does not intend is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected during the effective period of the operation in the button advance presentation effect (that is, when the flag is set during the operation effective period), It is configured not to change the function from invalid to valid (see step S907102). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  In addition, during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect, the decision display effect (shows the hit or not as a success or failure notification based on the detection of the pressing operation of the push button 9031B during the effective period (one-shot operation) Since the predetermined control is performed based on the detection of the pressing operation (single-shot operation) during the effective period in the effect of displaying the), the player does not have to perform the long-press operation. However, since it is assumed that the intention to perform a one-shot operation results in a long press operation, the operation period of the back button advance notice effect is valid (that is, when the flag is set during the special operation validity period) Or, even during the effective period of the operation in the determination button effect (when the determination button effect operation effective period flag indicating that it is in the effective period of the operation in the determination button effect is set), long press on the push button 9031B Even if the operation is detected, the function of the auto button may be configured not to be changed from disabled to enabled. Similarly, a single-shot operation of the push button 9031B may be performed to change the setting of the background image and the setting of the auto button from the setting menu being displayed, but the intention of performing the one-shot operation results in a long press operation. Since it is also assumed that the setting button is displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is set even if the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected. You may be configured not to change from invalid to valid.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, in order to execute the back button advance presentation effect, the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B must be performed. ing. Therefore, during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect, an operation for executing the back button advance notice effect may be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auto button is detected even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B is detected during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect (that is, when the flag is set during the special operation effective period). It is configured not to change the function of from valid to invalid (see step S907108). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B may be performed to change the setting of the background image and the setting of the auto button from the setting menu. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the setting menu is displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected. (Step S907109). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, the button preview effect is started, and when the player operates the push button 9031 B according to the button preview effect, the auto button Is changed from valid to invalid (for example, realized by the processing of steps S907101 and S907108 to S907111), but in addition to the function of the auto button is changed from valid to invalid, the detection result of the operation May be configured to be reflected in the button preview effect. With such a configuration, even if the function of the auto button is set to be effective, if the player wants to perform an operation, the operation can be immediately reflected in the effect.

  When the player operates the push button 9031B in accordance with the button advance effect started when the function of the auto button is set to be enabled, the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to invalid. Instead of the configuration, for example, the setting of the function of the auto button is not changed during execution of the button preview effect, and the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to disabled after the end of the button preview effect. Good. The configuration for changing the function of the auto button from valid to invalid after the end of the button preview effect can be realized, for example, by executing the following processing. When the CPU 90120 for effect control detects the operation of the push button 9031 B in step S 907 110, it executes the processing of steps S 907 111 to S 907 114 if it is not in the effective period of the button advance effect, and the automatic button function is effective if it is in the effective period. A process of setting an auto button change suspension flag indicating that the change of the state to the invalid state is suspended is executed, and the auto button setting process is ended without executing the processes of steps S907111 to S907114. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 has the function of the auto button if the auto button change suspension flag is set at the end of the button advance effect (for example, the timing when the advance notice is displayed or the end timing of the effective period). Change from valid to invalid (that is, reset the auto button valid flag and reset the auto button change pending flag). In the configuration where the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to disabled after completion of the button advance effect (configuration in which the change in setting of the auto button function is temporarily held), the continuous hitting operation of the push button 9031B is Among button preview effect A and button preview effect B in which the preview display is displayed based on the detection, and button preview effect C in which the preview display is displayed based on detection of the one-shot operation of push button 9031B. The present invention may be applied to either one or both.

  When the player operates the push button 9031 B in response to the button advance effect, the function of the auto button is changed from active to ineffective after the end of the button advance effect. In addition to detecting the operation of the push button 9031B at predetermined intervals by the function, it may be detected that the player actually operated the push button 9031B and reflected in the effect. That is, the continuous hit operation by the automatic button and the operation actually performed may be reflected in the effect. In such a configuration, for example, when the auto button change suspension flag is set, the value of the operation number counter (effect according to the value is performed) is updated at predetermined intervals by the function of the auto button. In addition to the above, this is realized by updating the value of the operation number counter according to the operation of the push button 9031B.

  Also, for example, when the push button 9031 B is configured to be deformable, and the push button 9031 B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state in accordance with a predetermined effect (that is, the effect is being executed with the deformation of the push button 9031 B Also in the case where the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, the setting of the auto button may not be changed. For example, in the case where the operation is strongly urged by deforming the push button 9031B, it is conceivable that there is no intention to change the setting even if the operation is performed. When the push button 9031 B is deformed to a shape different from the normal state, for example, the button portion is deformed to be projected to the player side more than the normal state, or combined in the normal state. In addition to the case where the button parts are separated or the case where a plurality of parts for button parts are combined to form one button part, etc., it is rotatable (for example, around the rotation axis in the vertical direction) The case where the rotatable or rotatable button portion around the horizontal rotation axis is rotated is also included.

  Next, a display mode in the case of setting the function of the auto button to valid or invalid will be described. FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the display mode when the function of the auto button is set to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 82, the mode of the display screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). In the case of FIG. 82 (1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (1), when the player performs a long press operation on the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed, as shown in FIG. 82 (2), the auto button Is set to be valid, a character string such as "auto button valid" is displayed on the image display device 905, and a message is displayed to the effect that the function of the auto button is set to be valid. At this time, control is performed to output the auto button effective effect sound from the speaker 908, and control to cause the push button 9031B to emit light in a special light emission mode (see steps S907103 to S907107).

  In addition, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, and the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is performed by the player, the function of the auto button is invalid as shown in FIG. The image display device 905 displays a character string such as "auto button invalid" and displays that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid. Further, at this time, control to output the auto button invalidation sound from the speaker 908 and control to cause the push button 9031 B to emit light in the normal light emission mode are performed (see steps S 907 110 to S 907 114).

  In the example of FIG. 82, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the same operation is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can be changed also in the demonstration screen display period, the big hit game period, and the like.

  Next, the difference between the case where automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed and the case where automatic continuous hitting by the automatic button function is performed will be described. FIG. 83 is an explanatory view showing a comparison example of an automatic continuous hit by a long press operation and an automatic continuous hit by an automatic button function. In the automatic continuous hit by long press operation during the effective period, the continuous hit determination is turned on after the lapse of a predetermined start standby period after the start of the long press operation of the push button 9031B, but in the start standby period It may be different depending on the type. In the description of FIG. 83, it is assumed that the start standby period of button preview effect A is 4 seconds, and the start standby period of button preview effect A is 2 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 83, it is assumed that the execution of the button preview effect A is determined.

  In the case where automatic consecutive hit by long press operation is performed after the start of the effective period for button advance effect A, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), start standby after start of long press operation of push button 9031B After the period (4 seconds) has elapsed, the continuous hit determination is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is being performed after 4 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display decreases Go).

  On the other hand, in the case where automatic consecutive hit by the automatic button function is performed for the button advance effect A, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the consecutive hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period (that is, Immediately after the start of the effective period, the processing is executed on the assumption that the continuous hitting operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display) Can be made different, which can enhance the rendering effect.

  In addition, with regard to button preview effect B, although an illustration is omitted when automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed after the start of the effective period, the start standby period (2 after the long press operation of push button 9031B is started After passing 2 seconds, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is being performed after 2 seconds of the long press operation and the scale of the gauge display decreases), and the button advance notice In the case of effect B, in the case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by the automatic button function, continuous hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the effective period. That is, in either case of button preview effects A and B, effects are produced when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, The timing at which (for example, the reduction of the scale of the gauge display) is performed is configured to be different.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the apparatus configuration, data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display apparatus 905, etc. may be changed and modified arbitrarily without departing from the scope of the present invention. Is possible.

  For example, in the above embodiment, although the display start timing ("initial" in FIG. 67) of an image such as a button was after super reach development (see FIG. 71A), the display start timing of an image such as a button is It may be before super reach development or at the time of super reach development. Further, in the above embodiment, the change timing of the image such as the button (“timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 67) is after the super reach development (see FIG. 71A). The change timing of the image, such as the button, may be before super reach development or at the time of super reach development.

  In addition, the variation pattern of the super reach with pseudo continuous variation ("PA4'-2", "PA4'-3", "PA5'-2", "PA5'-3", "PB4'-2", "PB4 In the variation pattern of all or a part of '-3', 'PB5'-2', 'PB5'-3'), temporary stop indication and re-variable indication may be performed after becoming super reach May be

  In addition, the button development effect may be executed (display of an image such as a button) over a plurality of variable displays (or re-variable displays) in the pseudo continuous change. As an example, when the variation pattern “PB4′-2” progresses from “variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and re-variable display → super reach β → final stop display” The display and change timings of the image such as the button in the variation pattern “PB4′-2” (“initial”, “timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 67) are “initial” before reaching, for example Also, reach between the first temporary stop display as "timing 1", after the first temporary stop display until revariable display as "timing 2" and after revariable display as "timing 3" Good. Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the variation pattern "PB4'-2", variable display start-> display small button (white) ("initial")-> reach-large button ( It changes to white) (the timing 1) → the first temporary stop display → no change (the timing 2) → the revariable display → changes to the large button (red) (the timing 3) → the final stop display. As another example, the variation pattern "PB5'-3" changes from variable display start to reach first display of temporary stop and re-variable display to super reach beta second display of temporary stop and re-variable display final When progressing to stop display, the display and change timing of an image such as a button in the fluctuation pattern “PB5′-3” is, for example, “initial” between reach and the first temporary stop display, After the first temporary stop display to the re-variable display as "timing 1", after developing to super reach β to the second temporary stop display as "timing 2", after the second re-variable display It may be "timing 3". Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the variation pattern "PB5'-3", the variable display start → reach → small button (white) is displayed ("initial") → first time Temporary stop display → Change to large button (white) (Time 1) → Re-variable display → Advance to super reach β → No change (timing 2) → Second temporary stop display → Re-variable display → Large button (red) It progresses like a change (timing 3)-> final stop display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when variable display start of a certain variable display is performed, whether or not to execute the button development effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (FIGS. 66, 68, 69 ( A) See) The presence or absence of the button development effect may be determined at another timing. For example, when there is a start winning, the presence or absence of the button development effect may be determined based on the change category or the like. It should be noted that, at other timings (for example, at the start winning), in addition to the presence or absence of the button development effect, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.) Good.

  When deciding the presence / absence of button development effect, effect mode of button development effect (button development effect pattern etc.) or effect mode of button etc, when there is a start winning, the button before variable display according to the start winning The button development effect may be started during the variable display related to the start winning combination without starting the development effect, or may be started before the variable display related to the start winning combination.

  In addition, when the button development effect is started before the variable display relating to the start winning combination (so-called, when the button development effect is executed by prefetching), the button development effect is immediately started at the start winning combination The button development effect may be started at the start of the variable display corresponding to the winning before the starting winning (the shift of the suspension display), or the variable displaying corresponding to the winning before the starting winning ( The button development effect may be started before the reach or after the reach). In addition, the period from the start of button development effect in the pre-reading period (at the start of display of button display etc.) to the predetermined timing (for example, T13 of FIG. 71) of variable display concerning the start winning is the button display period. is there.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button etc. action effect (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is suddenly executed without any foresight (for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the image JS 901 is Suddenly, the image TS901 is displayed suddenly as shown in FIG. 77H, and the image KS901 is displayed suddenly as shown in FIG. 80B). A notice effect for giving notice of being controlled to the gaming state (eg, an effect falling effect for dropping the movable role object 9017 down to the position of the central portion of the display area of the image display 905, a cut-in effect for cutting in the image, A button or other operation effect may be performed by executing a countdown effect or the like for displaying a number to count down. Specifically, it is sufficient if there is at least a case where a button etc. effect production is executed by execution of the preview production etc and a case where a button etc production effect is executed without the preview production being executed. May or may not be performed in the case where no action presentation such as a button is performed). In addition, the ratio of whether the image such as the button changes in the case where the effect such as the button etc is performed by the execution of the advance effect and the case where the effect such as the button etc is performed without the execution of the advance effect Alternatively, the ratio of changing to an image such as which button may be made different.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of display such as the button (“small button (white)”, “large button (white)”, “big button (red)”, “stick”). (See FIG. 69 (B)), depending on the type of display such as a button or the like, the degree of expectation of becoming a 16R probability variation jackpot may be different. Specifically, for example, the determination ratio of the button development effect category may be varied according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 49). Further, when a big hit is usually provided as a big hit type in addition to the big change big hit, depending on the type of display such as a button, the degree of expectation to be the big change big hit may be made different.

(A1) As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A And the specific indication corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, stick D904, shown in FIG. 67, FIG. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172) for performing small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. And the like), and the specific display execution means, as the specific display, the first specific display (for example, a small button (white D901 etc.) and an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, a big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 49) expectation, usually a big variation and a big variation big hit will be a probability variation big hit When the second identification display (for example, the first identification display is set to the small button (white) D901) having a high degree of expectation), the second identification display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display is the large button (red) D903. (2) The specific display can display a stick D 904 or the like, and after displaying the first specific display, an action effect (for example, the weak effect shown in FIG. 69C) is exerted on the specific display. , And the second specific display can be displayed by executing the middle effect presentation and the strong effect presentation (for example, after the small button (white) D 901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (C), FIG. 76 (D 76E as shown in FIG. 76E by executing the weak-action effect that displays the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 76E and FIG. 76E. ) After the large button (white) D 902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 76E or D 902 can be displayed, the large button (white) D 902 is operated as shown in FIG. 77 (H) or 77 (I). 77D is executed, and the stick D 904 can be displayed as shown in FIG. 77I, etc.).

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved. For example, when the specific display changes due to the action effect, the effect is easy to understand, and the effect is improved.

(A2) The gaming machine of (A1) performs the operation after displaying the first specific display in an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). By performing the effect, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after the large button (white) D 902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (E), FIG. 77 (H) or As shown in FIG. 77 (I), the large effect button (white) as shown in FIG. 77 (I) is executed by executing the middle effect presentation displaying the image TS901, the image TS902 and the image TS903 acting on the large button (white) D902. White) changing D902 to stick D904), the second specific display (e.g., FIG. 77 (e.g., FIG. 77 (e.g., T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80)); 77 (K), and an operation effect (eg, as shown in FIG. 77 (K)) as shown in FIG. 77 (L). And the like) are performed.

  According to the above configuration, the sense of expectation before the effective period can be enhanced.

(A3) In the gaming machine of (A1) or (A2) above, there are a plurality of types of action effects (for example, weak action effects, middle action effects, strong action effects, etc. shown in FIG. 69C), The rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), there is no change and there is a change (weak change, middle) In the case of change or strong change), the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, so the button changes to the second specific display according to which button etc. Different proportions).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3), the action effect includes a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 69C) There are a plurality of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D 902, large button (red) D 903, stick D 904, large button (white shown in FIG. 67, FIG. ) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is performed (for example, FIG. 69 (C In the case of weak change (one step change), medium change (two step change), and strong change (three step change), as shown in), weak action rendition, middle action rendition, strong action rendition Because each decision ratio of is different Depending on which button or other effect is performed, the ratio of weak change, medium change, or strong change differs, for example, when the small button (white) D 901 before the change, the weak change is performed Then, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, and a strong change is executed. And the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to which specific display differs depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is executed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. 79 is performed, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 80, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the changed stick D 904 executes the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change. Execute detected motion effects).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (A1) to (A5), the specific display execution means is an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 and the like shown in FIGS. When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 80, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous fluctuation) The specific display can be displayed over the display, the specific display can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and can be changed.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(A8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the game machine of any of the above (A1) to (A7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state etc.) , A countdown effect, a feature falling effect, etc.), and the action effect is executed by executing the advance effect.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

  (A9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be disabled) or in the second state (for example, the setting state relating to rendering) Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 81) which can be set to a state in which the auto button function is effectively set and the like, and a specific effect (for example, button advance notice when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, variable display effect process shown in FIG. 64, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, the detection result of the detecting means It is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied, but in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc.) are performed. The setting unit can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection unit during execution of variable display (for example, a portion that executes the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 81). Etc).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

(B1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) And specific indication corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button shown in FIG. 67, FIG. (White) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) And the specific display execution unit may perform, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901). ) And an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, a big hit expectation, an expectation to be a 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 49), an expectation to be a probability variation big hit when there is usually a big hit and a definite variation big hit The second specific display is a large specific button (white) D 902, a large specific button (red) D 903, a stick D 904, etc. (1) When the large display (white) D902 is used as the identification display, the second identification display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the second identification is displayed as the large button (red) D903. The display can display a stick D904 or the like, and the first specific display can be performed in an ineffective period of detection by the detection unit (for example, T4 to T11 or the like illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 80). After the display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 74C, after the small button (white) D901 is displayed, the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. G) Change to large button (white) D 902, and further change large button (white) D 902 to large button (red) D 903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I)), Detection by the detection means In the effective period (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80) of the second specific display after change (for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (J) and FIG. 75 (K) Operation presentation using red (D) D903 or large button (red) D903U etc. (For example, presentation showing the result as shown in FIG. 75 (L) by prompting operation as shown in FIG. 75 (K)) Is executed.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved. For example, since the specific display is changed during the ineffective period, a change can be shown, and the rendering effect is improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of the above (B1), the first specific display is an effect that acts on the specific display (for example, a weak effect, a medium effect, a strong effect shown in FIG. 69 (C)) Is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D 901 shown in FIG. 76C is a small button (as shown in FIG. 76D or 76E). White) The weak action effect of displaying the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the D901 is executed, and the large button (white) D902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (E), and the large shown in FIG. 77 (G) As shown in FIG. 77H and FIG. 77I, a button (white) D 902 is displayed while the image TS 901, the image TS 902, and the image TS 903 are displayed on the large button (white) D 902. According to Fig. 77 (I). The small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 80 (A) changes to the stick D904 as shown, and the image KS901 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 80 (B) and FIG. 80 (C). As a result of the strong-action effect of displaying the image KS 902 or the image KS 903 being executed, the image changes to the stick D 904 as shown in FIG. 80C.

  According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(B3) In the gaming machine of (B1) or (B2) above, the action effect acting on the specific display is a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action shown in FIG. 69 (C) etc.) And the like, and the rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of (weak change, medium change or strong change), since the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, depending on which button etc. the action production is executed, the second The rate of change to the specific display is different).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(B4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (B1) to (B3), the action effect acting on the specific display is of a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect shown in FIG. 69C, middle effect effect, The display mode of the specific display after the change is, for example, a large button (white) D 902, a large button (red) D 903, and a stick D 904 shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. There is a large button (white) D 902 U, a large button (red) D 903 U, a stick D 904 U, etc., and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 69C, in the case of weak change (one-step change), in medium change (two-step change), and in the case of strong change (three-step change), weak action effects, medium action Each decision of production, strong action production Because the ratio is different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, strong change is different depending on which button etc. effect presentation is executed.For example, when the small button (white) D901 before change is When the weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is performed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, which is strong When the change is performed, the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to any specific display differs depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is performed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. 79 is performed, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 80, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the changed stick D 904 executes the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change. Execute detected motion effects).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (B1) to (B5), the specific display execution means is an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIG. When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 80, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous change) The specific display can be displayed over the display, the specific display can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and can be changed.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(B8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the game machine of any of the above (B1) to (B7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state etc.) , The countdown effect, the feature fall effect, etc.), and the effect presentation acting on the specific display is performed by the execution of the advance presentation effect, and the second specification is performed by the action presentation being performed. It changes to the display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

  (B9) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (B1) to (B8) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be invalid) etc. or in the second state (for example, Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 81) which can be set to a state in which the auto button function is effectively set and the like, and a specific effect (for example, button advance notice when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, variable display effect process shown in FIG. 64, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, the detection result of the detecting means It is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied, but in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc.) are performed. The setting unit can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection unit during execution of variable display (for example, a portion that executes the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 81). Etc).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

  In the above (A1) to (A9) and the above (B1) to (B9), the “detection means” is not limited to the push button 9031 B and the stick controller 9031 A, and an object provided in a case ( A sensor that detects an operation (for example, an operation of pushing the whole or a part of the object in the back direction or downward direction, an operation of pulling the object in the front direction or upward direction, an operation of rotating or sliding) May be In addition, it may be a sensor or the like that detects the contact of the player's body (hand or the like) on the glass surface or the like, or a sensor that detects the motion of the player's body (hand or face or the like) not in contact with the gaming machine. Or the like. That is, the "detection means" may be a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera or the like. In the case where the “detection means” is, for example, a touch sensor capable of detecting a touch on the glass surface, the “specific display” is an image that evokes a touch on the glass surface (for example, an image imitating a palm etc. ) May be.

  In addition to the above, arbitrary changes and modifications are possible without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, in the above description, when it is determined to execute the button development effect, the button development effect category is determined before the button development effect pattern is determined (see FIG. 68), but the button development effect pattern is directly You may decide. That is, the concept of the button development effect category may not be used.

  The button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 67 is a button development effect pattern in which the “initial” is the “first mode (small button (white))”, but the “initial” is the “second mode (large button) A button development effect pattern may be provided that is (white)), "third mode (large button (red))", or "fourth mode (stick)".

  Further, in the above embodiment, the timing to start displaying an image such as a button is constant (T4), but the timing to start displaying an image such as a button may have a plurality of timings. There may be a plurality of timings for each type of image such as a button.

  Depending on the display start timing, the ratio of whether or not an image such as a button changes (grows up) later may be changed, and the ratio of changing to what extent. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate of change of an image such as a button or the like may be higher and the rate of change of stick habit may be higher. Further, in an aspect (described later) in which there are a plurality of types of timing when the non-effective period goes to the effective period, the ratio of the timing when the non-effective period goes to the effective period may be different according to the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the timing from the non-effective period to the effective period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than when it is early. Moreover, when there is an aspect (after-mentioned) which does not turn into an effective period from an ineffective period, you may vary the ratio of whether to become an effective period according to display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the ratio of the effective period may be higher than when it is early. Moreover, in the aspect which performs removal success production (after-mentioned), according to display start timing, the execution ratio of removal success production may be varied. For example, when the display start timing is late, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be higher than when it is early.

  Also, although the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 67 changes the image of a button or the like at maximum two change timings among three change timings (timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3), all (three There may be a button or the like that changes the image at the change timing of). That is, a button development effect pattern is provided which changes weakly at timing 1 (first to second), weakly changes at timing 2 (second to third), and weakly changes at timing 3 (third to fourth). It is also good. The change timing may not be three times, but may be once, twice, four times or more.

  Further, a button development effect pattern may be provided to notify the determination of a big hit. As an example, a large sized rainbow button image ("large button (rainbow)") imitating push button 9031 B or a rainbow stick controller image ("stick (rainbow)" imitating stick controller 9031 A " The button development effect pattern (sometimes referred to as the "big hit confirmation button development effect pattern") where "the fifth" is the "fifth mode" and "the fifth mode" is provided, and the variation pattern of the super reach (big hit) ( In "PB4'-X" and "PB5'-X"), there is a case where the button development effect pattern of the big hit decision may be determined, but the variation pattern ("PA4'-X" and "PA5'-X") of the super reach (loss) In “)”, the button development effect pattern of the big hit determination may not be determined.

  In addition, the operating means (push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) may emit light at least in part (or the periphery), and may change the operating means according to an image such as a button. For example, when no button or other image is displayed, the light emitting unit of the push button 9031 B and the light emitting unit of the stick controller 9031 A are turned off, and when the small button (white) is displayed, the light emitting unit of the push button 9031 B is white Lights up, and when the large button (white) is displayed, the light emitting portion of the push button 9031 B is blinked in white (or lit in red), and when the large button (red) is displayed, the push button 9031 B The light emitting unit may be lit in red (or blink in red), and the light emitting unit of the stick controller 9031A may be illuminated in white (or blink in white) when the stick is displayed. When the light emitting unit of the operation means is blinked, an image such as a button may be blinked.

  Further, in FIG. 67 and the like, the image such as a button corresponds to one of the two operation means (one operation means is made effective). Specifically, the small button (white), the large button (white), and the large button (red) correspond to the push button 9031 B, and the stick corresponds to the stick controller 9031 A. Instead of this, an image such as a button corresponding to both of the two operation means may be displayed. As an example, in any of the small button (white), the large button (white), the large button (red), and the stick, the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A may be effective. Since the effect is such that the operation means changes in the middle, by making both effective, it is possible to prevent a situation where the result (such as winning or losing) is not displayed although the operation is performed. Further, as another example, a logo mark corresponding to both the push button 9031 B and the stick controller 9031 A (for example, a logo mark related to a content used for rendering of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a brand name of the pachinko gaming machine 901 Logo mark etc) may be displayed. That is, when the logo mark is displayed during the effective period, the result is displayed even if the push button 9031 B is operated or the stick controller 9031 A is operated.

  Also, according to FIG. 69 (C), when “strong action effect” is executed, “strong change” is expected mainly, but “middle change” or “weak change” below expected In some cases, If the "strong change" or "weak change" occurs due to the execution of the "strong action effect", the "strong change" expected corresponds to a so-called fall, and the player may be discouraged. Therefore, the "strong action effect" may not be determined when the "weak change" or the "middle change" is made. As a result, when the "strong action effect" is executed, the "strong change" is determined, and the player is not discouraged. In addition, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the “middle effect effect”, it is expected that the “middle change” will mainly be made, but in some cases the “weak change” may be less than expected. Therefore, in the case of "weak change", "middle effect effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the "middle effect effect", the "middle change" or more is decided, and the player is not discouraged. Although "strong action effect" is not determined when "no change", "middle effect effect" may not be determined in addition to "strong action" when "no change".

  In addition, the change of the image such as the button is divided into the degree of change (the number of steps) ("weak action effect" to change one step, "middle effect effect" to change two steps, "strong action effect" to change three steps Etc.) but they are controlled (managed), but divided into what changes the change of the image such as the button etc. (for example, the second effect, the first aspect or the second aspect of changing from the first aspect to the second aspect) The control may be performed by changing the mode from the mode to the third mode, the first mode or the second mode, or the fourth mode for changing the mode from the third mode to the fourth mode.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the super reach is a so-called battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other, but the super reach is not limited to the battle effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, the story may be completed successfully (if the game is lost, the story may not be completed successfully). In addition, when the button development effect is executed in the story system super reach, for example, according to the operation in the effective period (as the operation effect), the result of the story is substituted for the result of the battle effect (e.g. It may be notified that (whether or not the story is completed successfully) is notified.

  An effect (hereinafter referred to as “removal effect” in which an image (for example, the restriction line K90 shown in FIGS. 74 to 80) for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress is removed when the ineffective period starts from the ineffective period. In addition, it may be called "removal success effect" in distinction from "removal failure effect" described later. For example, an effect (e.g., a character (such as a police officer or the like) recovers the control line K90) in which the control line K90 superimposed on the large button (white) D902 is removed between FIG. 79C and FIG. 79D. Effect that sucks the restriction line K90 into the vacuum cleaner, an effect that burns out the restriction line K90 with flames, an effect in which the large button (white) D902 itself shakes etc. and the restriction line K90 deviates) may be performed .

  In addition, the removal failure effect (effect in which an image for notifying that the removal success effect is common to at least a part of the effect modes and informing that it is in the non-effective period) may be executed. When the removal failure effect is executed, the super reach may be ended without being the effective period. That is, for example, when the removal success effect is executed in FIG. 79, FIG. 79 (C) → removal success effect → FIG. 79 (D) → FIG. 79 (E) → FIG. 79 (F) → FIG. If the removal failure effect is executed in FIG. 79, the transition may be made from FIG. 79 (C) → removal failure effect → FIG. 79 (F) → FIG. 79 (G). .

  In addition, there are multiple types of timing from the ineffective period to the effective period, and when the ineffective period is late when the ineffective period becomes late, the image such as the button is sufficient because the ineffective period is longer than when it is early. Change (growth). Also, in addition to the case where the removal failure effect is not performed even once, the removal success effect is performed after the removal failure effect is performed one or more times, or the removal failure effect is performed. After being executed one or more times, there may be cases where the removal success effect is not executed. As a result, when the player does not sufficiently grow an image such as a button, the removal success effect is not executed because it is premature as the arrival of the effective period (for example, the effect of trying to remove the restriction line K90 starts If it is done, it is hoped that ultimately the restriction line K90 will not be removed, that is not removal success production but removal failure production is being executed), but if the image such as a button is fully grown That the removal success effect is carried out as an effect of coming (for example, when the effect to remove the control line K90 is started, the control line K90 is eventually removed, that is, not the removal failure effect I hope that the removal success rendition is being performed). That is, it can be made to notice whether the presentation according to the situation is performed.

  In addition, the image for notifying that it is during the ineffective period may be not the image of the restriction line but another image. For example, it may be an image of a chain and a key placed on an image such as a button, or it may be an image of a translucent case for storing an image such as a button, or ice which is shown as an image such as a frozen button. It may be

  Depending on the type of the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period, the ratio of whether the image such as a button changes (grows up) or the ratio of changing to a later time may be made different. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate of change in the image of the button or the like may be higher later than in the case of “control line”, and the rate of change of the stick may be higher. Also, in an aspect in which there are multiple types of timing when the ineffective period comes to the effective period, if the ratio of the timing from the ineffective period to the effective period differs according to the type of the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period. You may For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate at which the timing from the non-effective period to the effective period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than in the case of the “regulatory line”. Further, in a case where the ineffective period does not become the effective period, the ratio of whether or not the effective period may be changed may be made according to an image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the ratio of the effective period may be higher than in the case of "regulatory line". Further, in the aspect of executing the removal success effect, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be varied according to the image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be set higher than in the case of “control line”.

  In addition, an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be changed (grown). For example, the small button (white) is set as a "control line", and the large button (white) is changed to "chain and key", and the large button (red) is used as a "translucent case". The image may be changed to notify that it is in the ineffective period at the same timing as the change timing of the button image, such as changing it to “ice” when it becomes a stick. . For example, when it is a large button (white), it changes from "control line" to "chain and key", and when it is a stick, it changes from "chain and key" to "semi-transparent case" and further "ice" The image for notifying that it is in the non-effective period may be changed at a timing different from the change timing of the image of the button or the like.

  In the aspect of changing the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period, the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period may be changed by the operation effect. The action effect of changing the image for informing that it is in the non-effective period may be the same (common) as the action effect of changing the image such as a button. In addition, when common effects and effects are executed, an image for notifying that an image such as a button or the like is in the ineffective period is also changed, and an information indicating that the image such as the button is also in the ineffective period is notified There may be a time when neither the image for change nor the change in one of the images changes. In addition, the action effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period and the action effect of changing the image such as a button may be different. That is, apart from the effect presentation that changes the image such as the button, a special effect presentation that changes the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be provided.

  In addition, there are cases where an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period changes (grows) by an effect of the same type, and an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period is removed. It may be. In other words, by performing the action effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period, it is notified that it is in the ineffective period as in the case where the removal effect described above is performed. In some cases, the image to be removed may be removed. That is, when a certain effect (effect having both action effect and removal effect property) is executed, there is a time when an image such as a button changes and a time when it does not change, and it is informed that it is during the ineffective period. There may be times when the image for change may be changed and when it may be removed. In addition, it may be removed after the change (for example, the "ice" after the change is removed after the change from the "semi-transparent case" to the "ice", etc.). Although the image for notifying that it is in the non-effective period has been described in two ways, whether it is removed or not removed, there are stages in the removal, and the images may be gradually removed. That is, when a certain effect (a effect having both the effect and the effect of the removal effect) or the removal effect is executed, the "ice" is slightly broken, and again, a certain effect (the effect having both the effect and the removal effect) or the removal The "ice" may be completely cracked and removed when the rendition is performed. If the image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress is in the process of removal, it may not be changed, or may be changed and return to the original state after the change. The state during the change may be maintained after the change. For example, if the "translucent case" is slightly broken, it may not be changed to "ice", or it may be changed to unbroken "ice", or it may be slightly broken. It may change.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the reserve data (first reserve information) of the first special figure game and the reserve data (second reserve information) of the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are digested in the order of winning ( 60) and second priority information may be prioritized and digested.

  Moreover, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to one having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10%. As shown in FIG. 69 (B) and FIG. 70 (A), those having relationships such as A: B = 100%: 0%, A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0% (ie, , 100% and 0% allocations are also included).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the number of rounds is 2 types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, three or more types of rounds may be sufficient. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probability variation big hit is provided as the big hit category is shown, but as described above, the game may include a non-deterministic variation big hit (usually a big hit) as the big hit category.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment showed the aspect which carries out the variable display of multiple types of special symbols, such as a number which shows "0"-"8", and a symbol which shows "-", and a display result is derived and displayed, the said variable display Is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  In the above embodiment, the big hit game state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, but the big hit game state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may be there.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-link, one change pattern specification command In the example of transmitting the change pattern, the effect control board 9012 may be notified of the change pattern by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 90100 for game control is before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, on the effect control board 9012 side, effect control in variable display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 90100, the variation time is notified by each of two commands, and a specific variation mode to be executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 9012. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main substrate 9011 stores the determination table for random number values (display result determination table, big hit type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main substrate 9011 at the start winning prize. Based on the random number values (MR1 'to MR3'), the main substrate 9011 refers to the random number value determination table and determines random number value determination processing (determination of whether or not to be a big hit, and determination of variation category, and big hit) In some cases, the determination of the type of the big hit is executed, and the effect control board 9012 receives an example of the determination result determined in the main board 9011 and shows an example of executing pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the mode of execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the random number value determination table is stored in the effect control substrate 9012 and the random number itself is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying random number values from the main substrate 9011) Is transmitted to the effect control board 9012), the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted in the main board 9011, and based on the received random number value, refers to the random number value determination table and refers to the random number value. The pre-reading notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the determination process of the random number value may be performed in the effect control board 9012. Further, the determination process of the random number value may be performed on both the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute the process of determining the random number value, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives the random number values (MR1 'and MR2') and performs determination of whether or not to be a big hit and determination of the type of big hit if it is a big hit, The determination result of the variation category determined by the main substrate 9011 based on the random value (MR3 ') may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the advance notice / notification effect based on the judgment result judged by itself and the judgment result judged by the main board 9011.

  The random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

In the above-described (means 1), the rendering combination 201 is an example of a rendering device, the push button 120 is an example of a movable body, and the mode (lighting of a feature LED) shown in FIG. However, the effect display device (image display device) 9, 905 is an example of the effect device, and the effect combination 201 can be operated (eg, moved, deformed, etc.) so that the effect display device (image display device) 9, 905 Alternatively, the movable role object 9017 may be used as an example of the movable body, and the display effect in the effect display devices (image display devices) 9 and 105 may be an example of the specific effect. That is, the specific effect and the specific display may be performed by the effect display devices (image display devices) 9 and 105.
In addition, when the first specific display changes to the second specific display in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the specific indication and the specific effect are associated, and the specific effect is executed in the effective period of detection by the detection means. The movable body may be made easy to operate. By doing so, when the first specific display changes to the second specific display during the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the specific effect is executed to increase the player's expectation for the movable body to operate. Can improve the fun of the game.

  In addition, for example, a gaming machine that gives a gaming score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a gaming value of a size specified by recording information of a gaming recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, a structure, an array, etc.). That is, although the determination value (decision value) to be compared with the extracted random value may be stored together in the ROM 90101, it may be dispersed (dotted) in a plurality of locations in the ROM 90101 and stored. Alternatively, the ROM 90101 may store a mathematical expression or program for outputting the result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 48) when the extracted random value is input. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 90121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.). For example, a slot machine to which the present invention is applied performs detection means (rendering button) capable of detecting the action of the player, and a specific display (rendering button image imitating a reproduction button) corresponding to the detecting means. And a specific display execution unit, wherein the specific display execution unit has a first specific display (a button image for presentation (white)) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display as the specific display. The second specific display (a button image for effect (red)) can be displayed (for example, a high expectation of becoming a bonus, etc.), and after displaying the first specific display, an action effect that acts on the specific display It may be a slot machine capable of displaying the second specific display by executing.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the computer device etc. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine which allows a player to play a predetermined game.

1 pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start winning opening 9a 1st holding memory displaying section 9b 2nd holding memory displaying section 20 special Variable winning ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Effect control board 100 Microcomputer for effect control 101 CPU for effect control
109 VDP
120 push button 122 stick controller 126 motor for vibrator 201 performance item 202 feature LED
303 Vibrated member 360 button LED
901 pachinko gaming machine 902 gaming board 903 gaming machine frame 904A 1st special symbol display device 904B 2nd special symbol display device 905 image display device 905H start winning memory display area 906A regular winning ball device 906B regular variable winning ball device 907 special variable Winning ball device 908 speaker 909 lamp 9011 main board 9012 effect control board 9013 voice control board 9014 lamp control board 9015 relay board 9016 item control board 9017 movable part 9020 normal symbol display 9021 gate switch 9022A 1st starting opening switch 9022B first 2 Start mouth switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Microcomputer for game control 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit 90126 RTC circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A rendering device capable of performing rendering,
An operable movable body,
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device;
Movable body control means for operating the movable body;
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
Specific display execution means for performing specific display corresponding to the detection means;
Equipped with
The movable body control means is capable of operating the movable body when the specific effect is performed,
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, it is possible to display a first specific display and a second specific display which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display.
After the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display,
A game machine characterized in that an operation effect using the second specific display after change is executed in an effective period of detection by the detection means.